Merge remote-tracking branch 'upstream/master' into fix_repeatcmdline

1 files changed, 10075 insertions, 2887 deletions

diff --git a/src/nvim/options.lua b/src/nvim/options.lua
index 387ccd0888..daaf73d241 100644
--- a/src/nvim/options.lua
+++ b/src/nvim/options.lua
@@ -1,2905 +1,10093 @@
--- {
---  {
---    full_name='aleph', abbreviation='al',
---    short_desc="ASCII code of the letter Aleph (Hebrew)",
---    varname='p_aleph', pv_name=nil,
---    type='number', list=nil, scope={'global'},
---    deny_duplicates=nil,
---    enable_if=nil,
---    defaults={condition=nil, if_true=224, if_false=nil},
---    secure=nil, gettext=nil, noglob=nil, normal_fname_chars=nil,
---    pri_mkrc=nil, deny_in_modelines=nil, normal_dname_chars=nil,
---    modelineexpr=nil,
---    func=nil,
---    expand=nil, nodefault=nil, no_mkrc=nil,
---    alloced=nil,
---    save_pv_indir=nil,
---    redraw={'curswant'},
---  }
--- }
--- types: bool, number, string
--- lists: (nil), comma, onecomma, flags, flagscomma
--- scopes: global, buffer, window
--- redraw options: statuslines, tabline, current_window, current_window_only,
---                 current_buffer, all_windows, curswant
--- defaults: {condition=#if condition, if_true=default, if_false=default}
--- #if condition:
---    string: #ifdef string
---    !string: #ifndef string
---    {string, string}: #if defined(string) && defined(string)
---    {!string, !string}: #if !defined(string) && !defined(string)
-local cstr = function(s)
+--- @class vim.option_meta
+--- @field full_name string
+--- @field desc? string
+--- @field abbreviation? string
+--- @field short_desc? string|fun(): string
+--- @field varname? string
+--- @field pv_name? string
+--- @field type 'bool'|'number'|'string'
+--- @field immutable? boolean
+--- @field list? 'comma'|'onecomma'|'commacolon'|'onecommacolon'|'flags'|'flagscomma'
+--- @field scope vim.option_scope[]
+--- @field deny_duplicates? boolean
+--- @field enable_if? string|false
+--- @field defaults? vim.option_defaults
+--- @field secure? true
+--- @field noglob? true
+--- @field normal_fname_chars? true
+--- @field pri_mkrc? true
+--- @field deny_in_modelines? true
+--- @field normal_dname_chars? true
+--- @field modelineexpr? true
+--- @field func? true
+--- @field expand? string|true
+--- @field nodefault? true
+--- @field no_mkrc? true
+--- @field alloced? true
+--- @field redraw? vim.option_redraw[]
+--- @field cb? string
+--- @field expand_cb? string
+--- @field tags? string[]
+
+--- @class vim.option_defaults
+--- @field condition? string
+---    string: #ifdef string
+---    !string: #ifndef string
+--- @field if_true integer|boolean|string|fun(): string
+--- @field if_false? integer|boolean|string
+--- @field doc? string Default to show in options.txt
+--- @field meta? integer|boolean|string Default to use in Lua meta files
+
+--- @alias vim.option_scope 'global'|'buffer'|'window'
+
+--- @alias vim.option_redraw
+--- |'statuslines'
+--- |'tabline'
+--- |'current_window'
+--- |'current_window_only'
+--- |'current_buffer'
+--- |'all_windows'
+--- |'curswant'
+--- |'ui_option'
+
+--- @param s string
+--- @return string
+local function cstr(s)
   return '"' .. s:gsub('["\\]', '\\%0'):gsub('\t', '\\t') .. '"'
 end
-local macros=function(s)
+
+--- @param s string
+--- @return fun(): string
+local function macros(s)
   return function()
     return s
   end
 end
-local imacros=function(s)
+
+--- @param s string
+--- @return fun(): string
+local function imacros(s)
   return function()
     return '(intptr_t)' .. s
   end
 end
-local N_=function(s) -- luacheck: ignore 211 (currently unused)
+
+--- @param s string
+--- @return fun(): string
+local function N_(s) -- luacheck: ignore 211 (currently unused)
   return function()
     return 'N_(' .. cstr(s) .. ')'
   end
 end
--- used for 'cinkeys' and 'indentkeys'
-local indentkeys_default = '0{,0},0),0],:,0#,!^F,o,O,e';
+
+-- luacheck: ignore 621
 return {
-  cstr=cstr,
-  options={
-    {
-      full_name='aleph', abbreviation='al',
-      short_desc=N_("ASCII code of the letter Aleph (Hebrew)"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'curswant'},
-      varname='p_aleph',
-      defaults={if_true=224}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='arabic', abbreviation='arab',
-      short_desc=N_("Arabic as a default second language"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'curswant'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='arabicshape', abbreviation='arshape',
-      short_desc=N_("do shaping for Arabic characters"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'all_windows', 'ui_option'},
+  cstr = cstr,
+  --- @type vim.option_meta[]
+  options = {
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'al',
+      defaults = { if_true = 224 },
+      full_name = 'aleph',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('ASCII code of the letter Aleph (Hebrew)'),
+      type = 'number',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'arab',
+      cb = 'did_set_arabic',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
+        Setting this option will:
+        - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
+        - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
+        - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
+          between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
+        - Set the 'delcombine' option
 
-      varname='p_arshape',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='allowrevins', abbreviation='ari',
-      short_desc=N_("allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ari',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='ambiwidth', abbreviation='ambw',
-      short_desc=N_("what to do with Unicode chars of ambiguous width"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'all_windows', 'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_ambw',
-      defaults={if_true="single"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='autochdir', abbreviation='acd',
-      short_desc=N_("change directory to the file in the current window"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_acd',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='autoindent', abbreviation='ai',
-      short_desc=N_("take indent for new line from previous line"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_ai',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='autoread', abbreviation='ar',
-      short_desc=N_("autom. read file when changed outside of Vim"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      varname='p_ar',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='autowrite', abbreviation='aw',
-      short_desc=N_("automatically write file if changed"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_aw',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='autowriteall', abbreviation='awa',
-      short_desc=N_("as 'autowrite', but works with more commands"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_awa',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='background', abbreviation='bg',
-      short_desc=N_("\"dark\" or \"light\", used for highlight colors"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_bg',
-      defaults={if_true="dark"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='backspace', abbreviation='bs',
-      short_desc=N_("how backspace works at start of line"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_bs',
-      defaults={if_true="indent,eol,start"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='backup', abbreviation='bk',
-      short_desc=N_("keep backup file after overwriting a file"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_bk',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='backupcopy', abbreviation='bkc',
-      short_desc=N_("make backup as a copy, don't rename the file"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_bkc',
-      defaults={
-        condition='UNIX',
-        if_true="auto",
-        if_false="auto"
+        Resetting this option will:
+        - Reset the 'rightleft' option.
+        - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
+        Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
+        option).
+        Also see |arabic.txt|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'arabic',
+      redraw = { 'curswant' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('Arabic as a default second language'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'arshape',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
+        corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
+        take effect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
+        one which encompasses:
+          a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
+             within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
+          b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
+          c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
+        When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone
+        form.
+        Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
+        further details see |arabic.txt|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'arabicshape',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('do shaping for Arabic characters'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_arshape',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ari',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode.  This is default off, to
+        avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get
+        into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out.  See
+        'revins'.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'allowrevins',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ari',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ambw',
+      cb = 'did_set_ambiwidth',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'single' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
+        Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
+        letters, Cyrillic letters).
+
+        There are currently two possible values:
+        "single":	Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII.  This is
+        		expected by most users.
+        "double":	Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
+        						*E834* *E835*
+        The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
+        contains a character that would be double width.  These errors may
+        also be given when calling setcellwidths().
+
+        The values are overruled for characters specified with
+        |setcellwidths()|.
+
+        There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
+        those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
+        legacy/traditional CJK encodings.  In those encodings, Euro,
+        Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
+        therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them.  This is also
+        true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
+        file.  Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
+        Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
+        (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
+        this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
+        by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font.  Perhaps it also has
+        to be set to "double" under CJK MS-Windows when the system locale is
+        set to one of CJK locales.  See Unicode Standard Annex #11
+        (https://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_ambiwidth',
+      full_name = 'ambiwidth',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('what to do with Unicode chars of ambiguous width'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ambw',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'acd',
+      cb = 'did_set_autochdir',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you
+        open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window.
+        It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened
+        or selected.  When a buffer has no name it also has no directory, thus
+        the current directory won't change when navigating to it.
+        Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'autochdir',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('change directory to the file in the current window'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_acd',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ai',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
+        in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command).  If you do not
+        type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
+        <Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again.  Moving the cursor
+        to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included
+        in 'cpoptions'.
+        When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you
+        reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first
+        line.
+        When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
+        a different way.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'autoindent',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('take indent for new line from previous line'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ai',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ar',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
+        it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
+        When the file has been deleted this is not done, so you have the text
+        from before it was deleted.  When it appears again then it is read.
+        |timestamp|
+        If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
+        using the global value: >
+        	:set autoread<
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'autoread',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('autom. read file when changed outside of Vim'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ar',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'aw',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
+        `:next`, `:rewind`, `:last`, `:first`, `:previous`, `:stop`,
+        `:suspend`, `:tag`, `:!`, `:make`, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when
+        a `:buffer`, CTRL-O, CTRL-I, '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one
+        to another file.
+        A buffer is not written if it becomes hidden, e.g. when 'bufhidden' is
+        set to "hide" and `:next` is used.
+        Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
+        'autowriteall' for that.
+        Some buffers will not be written, specifically when 'buftype' is
+        "nowrite", "nofile", "terminal" or "prompt".
+        USE WITH CARE: If you make temporary changes to a buffer that you
+        don't want to be saved this option may cause it to be saved anyway.
+        Renaming the buffer with ":file {name}" may help avoid this.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'autowrite',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('automatically write file if changed'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_aw',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'awa',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit",
+        ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window.
+        Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
+        been set.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'autowriteall',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("as 'autowrite', but works with more commands"),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_awa',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bg',
+      cb = 'did_set_background',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'dark' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When set to "dark" or "light", adjusts the default color groups for
+        that background type.  The |TUI| or other UI sets this on startup
+        (triggering |OptionSet|) if it can detect the background color.
+
+        This option does NOT change the background color, it tells Nvim what
+        the "inherited" (terminal/GUI) background looks like.
+        See |:hi-normal| if you want to set the background color explicitly.
+        					*g:colors_name*
+        When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set)
+        setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded.  If
+        the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
+        However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
+        be undone.  First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed.
+
+        Normally this option would be set in the vimrc file.  Possibly
+        depending on the terminal name.  Example: >
+        	:if $TERM ==# "xterm"
+        	:  set background=dark
+        	:endif
+        <	When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups
+        will change.  To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
+        the setting of the 'background' option.
+        This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file
+        to select the colors for syntax highlighting.  After changing this
+        option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result.  This can be
+        done with ":syntax on".
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_background',
+      full_name = 'background',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('"dark" or "light", used for highlight colors'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_bg',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bs',
+      cb = 'did_set_backspace',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'indent,eol,start' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
+        mode.  This is a list of items, separated by commas.  Each item allows
+        a way to backspace over something:
+        value	effect	~
+        indent	allow backspacing over autoindent
+        eol	allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
+        start	allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
+        	stop once at the start of insert.
+        nostop	like start, except CTRL-W and CTRL-U do not stop at the start of
+        	insert.
+
+        When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used, none of
+        the ways mentioned for the items above are possible.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_backspace',
+      full_name = 'backspace',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('how backspace works at start of line'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_bs',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bk',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Make a backup before overwriting a file.  Leave it around after the
+        file has been successfully written.  If you do not want to keep the
+        backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
+        written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
+        the default).  If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
+        options (use this if your file system is almost full).  See the
+        |backup-table| for more explanations.
+        When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
+        When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
+        oldest version of a file.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'backup',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('keep backup file after overwriting a file'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_bk',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bkc',
+      cb = 'did_set_backupcopy',
+      defaults = { condition = 'UNIX', if_false = 'auto', if_true = 'auto' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
+        done.  This is a comma-separated list of words.
+
+        The main values are:
+        "yes"	make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
+        "no"	rename the file and write a new one
+        "auto"	one of the previous, what works best
+
+        Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
+        "breaksymlink"	always break symlinks when writing
+        "breakhardlink"	always break hardlinks when writing
+
+        Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
+        - Takes extra time to copy the file.
+        + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
+          has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
+        - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
+          not of the real file.
+
+        Renaming the file and writing a new one:
+        + It's fast.
+        - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
+          file.
+        - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.
+
+        The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming the
+        file is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on
+        and the file is not a link) that is used.  When problems are expected,
+        a copy will be made.
+
+        The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
+        combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto".  When included, they
+        force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
+        exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
+        become the backup and writing a new file in its place.  This can be
+        useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
+        hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
+        be propagated back to the original source.
+        						*crontab*
+        One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
+        that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
+        the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
+        backup file instead of the newly created file.  "crontab -e" is an
+        example.
+
+        When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
+        with the new text.  This means that protection bits, owner and
+        symbolic links of the original file are unmodified.  The backup file,
+        however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file.  The
+        group of the backup is set to the group of the original file.  If this
+        fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
+        others.
+
+        When the file is renamed, this is the other way around: The backup has
+        the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
+        is owned by the current user.  When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
+        link, the new file will not!  That's why the "auto" value doesn't
+        rename when the file is a link.  The owner and group of the newly
+        written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
+        the system may refuse to do this.  In that case the "auto" value will
+        again not rename the file.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_backupcopy',
+      full_name = 'backupcopy',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_("make backup as a copy, don't rename the file"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_bkc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bdir',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
+        - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
+          where this is possible.  If none of the directories exist Nvim will
+          attempt to create the last directory in the list.
+        - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
+          impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
+        - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
+          as the edited file.
+        - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-Windows) means to put
+          the backup file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading
+          "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
+          ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
+        - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
+          of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
+          name, precede it with a backslash.
+        - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
+        - A directory name may end in an '/'.
+        - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//",
+          the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
+          with all path separators changed to percent '%' signs. This will
+          ensure file name uniqueness in the backup directory.
+          On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\".  However, When a
+          separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will
+          include the comma in the file name. Therefore it is recommended to
+          use '//', instead of '\\'.
+        - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+        - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
+          get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
+            :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
+        <
+        See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
+        If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >
+        	:set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
+        <	You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
+        home directory for this to work properly.
+        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+        uses another default.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = 'nodefault',
+      full_name = 'backupdir',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('list of directories for the backup file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_bdir',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bex',
+      cb = 'did_set_backupext_or_patchmode',
+      defaults = { if_true = '~' },
+      desc = [=[
+        String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
+        backup file.  The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
+        accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file.  You might
+        prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
+        ".bak" that you want to keep.
+        Only normal file name characters can be used; `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
+
+        If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre
+        autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to
+        include a timestamp. >
+        	:au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' .. strftime("%Y%b%d%X") .. '~'
+        <	Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'backupext',
+      normal_fname_chars = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('extension used for the backup file'),
+      tags = { 'E589' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_bex',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bsk',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = '',
+        doc = [["$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
+        Unix: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
+        Mac: "/private/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"]],
+        meta = '/tmp/*',
       },
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='backupdir', abbreviation='bdir',
-      short_desc=N_("list of directories for the backup file"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      expand='nodefault',
-      varname='p_bdir',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='backupext', abbreviation='bex',
-      short_desc=N_("extension used for the backup file"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      normal_fname_chars=true,
-      varname='p_bex',
-      defaults={if_true="~"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='backupskip', abbreviation='bsk',
-      short_desc=N_("no backup for files that match these patterns"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_bsk',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='belloff', abbreviation='bo',
-      short_desc=N_("do not ring the bell for these reasons"),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_bo',
-      defaults={if_true="all"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='binary', abbreviation='bin',
-      short_desc=N_("read/write/edit file in binary mode"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_bin',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='bomb',
-      short_desc=N_("a Byte Order Mark to the file"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_bomb',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='breakat', abbreviation='brk',
-      short_desc=N_("characters that may cause a line break"),
-      type='string', list='flags', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'all_windows'},
-      varname='p_breakat',
-      defaults={if_true=" \t!@*-+;:,./?"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='breakindent', abbreviation='bri',
-      short_desc=N_("wrapped line repeats indent"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='breakindentopt', abbreviation='briopt',
-      short_desc=N_("settings for 'breakindent'"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'window'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_buffer'},
-      defaults={if_true=""},
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='browsedir', abbreviation='bsdir',
-      short_desc=N_("which directory to start browsing in"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      enable_if=false,
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='bufhidden', abbreviation='bh',
-      short_desc=N_("what to do when buffer is no longer in window"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      noglob=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_bh',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='buflisted', abbreviation='bl',
-      short_desc=N_("whether the buffer shows up in the buffer list"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      noglob=true,
-      varname='p_bl',
-      defaults={if_true=1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='buftype', abbreviation='bt',
-      short_desc=N_("special type of buffer"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      noglob=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_bt',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='casemap', abbreviation='cmp',
-      short_desc=N_("specifies how case of letters is changed"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_cmp',
-      defaults={if_true="internal,keepascii"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cdhome', abbreviation='cdh',
-      short_desc=N_(":cd without argument goes to the home directory"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_cdh',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cdpath', abbreviation='cd',
-      short_desc=N_("list of directories searched with \":cd\""),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      expand=true,
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_cdpath',
-      defaults={if_true=",,"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cedit',
-      short_desc=N_("used to open the command-line window"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_cedit',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('CTRL_F_STR')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='channel',
-      short_desc=N_("Channel connected to the buffer"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      nodefault=true,
-      varname='p_channel',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='charconvert', abbreviation='ccv',
-      short_desc=N_("expression for character encoding conversion"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_ccv',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cindent', abbreviation='cin',
-      short_desc=N_("do C program indenting"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_cin',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cinkeys', abbreviation='cink',
-      short_desc=N_("keys that trigger indent when 'cindent' is set"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_cink',
-      defaults={if_true=indentkeys_default}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cinoptions', abbreviation='cino',
-      short_desc=N_("how to do indenting when 'cindent' is set"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_cino',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cinwords', abbreviation='cinw',
-      short_desc=N_("words where 'si' and 'cin' add an indent"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_cinw',
-      defaults={if_true="if,else,while,do,for,switch"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cinscopedecls', abbreviation='cinsd',
-      short_desc=N_("words that are recognized by 'cino-g'"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_cinsd',
-      defaults={if_true="public,protected,private"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='clipboard', abbreviation='cb',
-      short_desc=N_("use the clipboard as the unnamed register"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_cb',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cmdheight', abbreviation='ch',
-      short_desc=N_("number of lines to use for the command-line"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'all_windows'},
-      varname='p_ch',
-      defaults={if_true=1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cmdwinheight', abbreviation='cwh',
-      short_desc=N_("height of the command-line window"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_cwh',
-      defaults={if_true=7}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='colorcolumn', abbreviation='cc',
-      short_desc=N_("columns to highlight"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'window'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='columns', abbreviation='co',
-      short_desc=N_("number of columns in the display"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      varname='p_columns',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('DFLT_COLS')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='comments', abbreviation='com',
-      short_desc=N_("patterns that can start a comment line"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'curswant'},
-      varname='p_com',
-      defaults={if_true="s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='commentstring', abbreviation='cms',
-      short_desc=N_("template for comments; used for fold marker"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'curswant'},
-      varname='p_cms',
-      defaults={if_true="/*%s*/"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='compatible', abbreviation='cp',
-      short_desc=N_("No description"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_force_off',
-      -- pri_mkrc isn't needed here, optval_default()
-      -- always returns TRUE for 'compatible'
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='complete', abbreviation='cpt',
-      short_desc=N_("specify how Insert mode completion works"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_cpt',
-      defaults={if_true=".,w,b,u,t"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='concealcursor', abbreviation='cocu',
-      short_desc=N_("whether concealable text is hidden in cursor line"),
-      type='string', scope={'window'},
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='conceallevel', abbreviation='cole',
-      short_desc=N_("whether concealable text is shown or hidden"),
-      type='number', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='completefunc', abbreviation='cfu',
-      short_desc=N_("function to be used for Insert mode completion"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      secure=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      func=true,
-      varname='p_cfu',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='completeopt', abbreviation='cot',
-      short_desc=N_("options for Insert mode completion"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_cot',
-      defaults={if_true="menu,preview"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='completeslash', abbreviation='csl',
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_csl',
-      enable_if='BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='confirm', abbreviation='cf',
-      short_desc=N_("ask what to do about unsaved/read-only files"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_confirm',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='copyindent', abbreviation='ci',
-      short_desc=N_("make 'autoindent' use existing indent structure"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_ci',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cpoptions', abbreviation='cpo',
-      short_desc=N_("flags for Vi-compatible behavior"),
-      type='string', list='flags', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'all_windows'},
-      varname='p_cpo',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('CPO_VIM')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cursorbind', abbreviation='crb',
-      short_desc=N_("move cursor in window as it moves in other windows"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      pv_name='p_crbind',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cursorcolumn', abbreviation='cuc',
-      short_desc=N_("highlight the screen column of the cursor"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window_only'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cursorline', abbreviation='cul',
-      short_desc=N_("highlight the screen line of the cursor"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window_only'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='cursorlineopt', abbreviation='culopt',
-      short_desc=N_("settings for 'cursorline'"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'window'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      redraw={'current_window_only'},
-      defaults={if_true="both"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='debug',
-      short_desc=N_("to \"msg\" to see all error messages"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_debug',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='define', abbreviation='def',
-      short_desc=N_("pattern to be used to find a macro definition"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'curswant'},
-      varname='p_def',
-      defaults={if_true="^\\s*#\\s*define"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='delcombine', abbreviation='deco',
-      short_desc=N_("delete combining characters on their own"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_deco',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='dictionary', abbreviation='dict',
-      short_desc=N_("list of file names used for keyword completion"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      normal_dname_chars=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_dict',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='diff',
-      short_desc=N_("diff mode for the current window"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      noglob=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='diffexpr', abbreviation='dex',
-      short_desc=N_("expression used to obtain a diff file"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      redraw={'curswant'},
-      varname='p_dex',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='diffopt', abbreviation='dip',
-      short_desc=N_("options for using diff mode"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      varname='p_dip',
-      defaults={if_true="internal,filler,closeoff"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='digraph', abbreviation='dg',
-      short_desc=N_("enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_dg',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='directory', abbreviation='dir',
-      short_desc=N_("list of directory names for the swap file"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      expand='nodefault',
-      varname='p_dir',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='display', abbreviation='dy',
-      short_desc=N_("list of flags for how to display text"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      redraw={'all_windows'},
-      varname='p_dy',
-      defaults={if_true="lastline"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='eadirection', abbreviation='ead',
-      short_desc=N_("in which direction 'equalalways' works"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ead',
-      defaults={if_true="both"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='edcompatible', abbreviation='ed',
-      short_desc=N_("No description"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_force_off',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='emoji', abbreviation='emo',
-      short_desc=N_("No description"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'all_windows', 'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_emoji',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='encoding', abbreviation='enc',
-      short_desc=N_("encoding used internally"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      deny_in_modelines=true,
-      varname='p_enc',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('ENC_DFLT')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='endoffile', abbreviation='eof',
-      short_desc=N_("write CTRL-Z for last line in file"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_eof',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='endofline', abbreviation='eol',
-      short_desc=N_("write <EOL> for last line in file"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_eol',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='equalalways', abbreviation='ea',
-      short_desc=N_("windows are automatically made the same size"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ea',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='equalprg', abbreviation='ep',
-      short_desc=N_("external program to use for \"=\" command"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_ep',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='errorbells', abbreviation='eb',
-      short_desc=N_("ring the bell for error messages"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_eb',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='errorfile', abbreviation='ef',
-      short_desc=N_("name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_ef',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('DFLT_ERRORFILE')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='errorformat', abbreviation='efm',
-      short_desc=N_("description of the lines in the error file"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_efm',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('DFLT_EFM')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='eventignore', abbreviation='ei',
-      short_desc=N_("autocommand events that are ignored"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_ei',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='expandtab', abbreviation='et',
-      short_desc=N_("use spaces when <Tab> is inserted"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_et',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='exrc', abbreviation='ex',
-      short_desc=N_("read .nvimrc and .exrc in the current directory"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_exrc',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='fileencoding', abbreviation='fenc',
-      short_desc=N_("file encoding for multi-byte text"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines', 'current_buffer'},
-      varname='p_fenc',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='fileencodings', abbreviation='fencs',
-      short_desc=N_("automatically detected character encodings"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_fencs',
-      defaults={if_true="ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='fileformat', abbreviation='ff',
-      short_desc=N_("file format used for file I/O"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'curswant', 'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_ff',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('DFLT_FF')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='fileformats', abbreviation='ffs',
-      short_desc=N_("automatically detected values for 'fileformat'"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_ffs',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('DFLT_FFS_VIM')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='fileignorecase', abbreviation='fic',
-      short_desc=N_("ignore case when using file names"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_fic',
-      defaults={
-        condition='CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME',
-        if_true=true,
-        if_false=false,
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='filetype', abbreviation='ft',
-      short_desc=N_("type of file, used for autocommands"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      noglob=true,
-      normal_fname_chars=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_ft',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='fillchars', abbreviation='fcs',
-      short_desc=N_("characters to use for displaying special items"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global', 'window'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      varname='p_fcs',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='fixendofline', abbreviation='fixeol',
-      short_desc=N_("make sure last line in file has <EOL>"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_fixeol',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldclose', abbreviation='fcl',
-      short_desc=N_("close a fold when the cursor leaves it"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      varname='p_fcl',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldcolumn', abbreviation='fdc',
-      short_desc=N_("width of the column used to indicate folds"),
-      type='string', scope={'window'},
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true="0"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldenable', abbreviation='fen',
-      short_desc=N_("set to display all folds open"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldexpr', abbreviation='fde',
-      short_desc=N_("expression used when 'foldmethod' is \"expr\""),
-      type='string', scope={'window'},
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true="0"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldignore', abbreviation='fdi',
-      short_desc=N_("ignore lines when 'foldmethod' is \"indent\""),
-      type='string', scope={'window'},
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true="#"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldlevel', abbreviation='fdl',
-      short_desc=N_("close folds with a level higher than this"),
-      type='number', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldlevelstart', abbreviation='fdls',
-      short_desc=N_("'foldlevel' when starting to edit a file"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'curswant'},
-      varname='p_fdls',
-      defaults={if_true=-1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldmarker', abbreviation='fmr',
-      short_desc=N_("markers used when 'foldmethod' is \"marker\""),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'window'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true="{{{,}}}"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldmethod', abbreviation='fdm',
-      short_desc=N_("folding type"),
-      type='string', scope={'window'},
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true="manual"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldminlines', abbreviation='fml',
-      short_desc=N_("minimum number of lines for a fold to be closed"),
-      type='number', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldnestmax', abbreviation='fdn',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum fold depth"),
-      type='number', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=20}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldopen', abbreviation='fdo',
-      short_desc=N_("for which commands a fold will be opened"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      redraw={'curswant'},
-      varname='p_fdo',
-      defaults={if_true="block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,search,tag,undo"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='foldtext', abbreviation='fdt',
-      short_desc=N_("expression used to display for a closed fold"),
-      type='string', scope={'window'},
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true="foldtext()"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='formatexpr', abbreviation='fex',
-      short_desc=N_("expression used with \"gq\" command"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_fex',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='formatoptions', abbreviation='fo',
-      short_desc=N_("how automatic formatting is to be done"),
-      type='string', list='flags', scope={'buffer'},
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_fo',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('DFLT_FO_VIM')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='formatlistpat', abbreviation='flp',
-      short_desc=N_("pattern used to recognize a list header"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_flp',
-      defaults={if_true="^\\s*\\d\\+[\\]:.)}\\t ]\\s*"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='formatprg', abbreviation='fp',
-      short_desc=N_("name of external program used with \"gq\" command"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_fp',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='fsync', abbreviation='fs',
-      short_desc=N_("whether to invoke fsync() after file write"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_fs',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='gdefault', abbreviation='gd',
-      short_desc=N_("the \":substitute\" flag 'g' is default on"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_gd',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='grepformat', abbreviation='gfm',
-      short_desc=N_("format of 'grepprg' output"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_gefm',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('DFLT_GREPFORMAT')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='grepprg', abbreviation='gp',
-      short_desc=N_("program to use for \":grep\""),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_gp',
-      defaults={
-        condition='MSWIN',
-        -- Add an extra file name so that grep will always
-        -- insert a file name in the match line. */
-        if_true="findstr /n $* nul",
-        if_false="grep -n $* /dev/null"
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='guicursor', abbreviation='gcr',
-      short_desc=N_("GUI: settings for cursor shape and blinking"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_guicursor',
-      defaults={if_true="n-v-c-sm:block,i-ci-ve:ver25,r-cr-o:hor20"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='guifont', abbreviation='gfn',
-      short_desc=N_("GUI: Name(s) of font(s) to be used"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_guifont',
-      redraw={'ui_option'},
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='guifontwide', abbreviation='gfw',
-      short_desc=N_("list of font names for double-wide characters"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      redraw={'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_guifontwide',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='guioptions', abbreviation='go',
-      short_desc=N_("GUI: Which components and options are used"),
-      type='string', list='flags', scope={'global'},
-      enable_if=false,
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='guitablabel', abbreviation='gtl',
-      short_desc=N_("GUI: custom label for a tab page"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      enable_if=false,
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='guitabtooltip', abbreviation='gtt',
-      short_desc=N_("GUI: custom tooltip for a tab page"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      enable_if=false,
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='helpfile', abbreviation='hf',
-      short_desc=N_("full path name of the main help file"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_hf',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('DFLT_HELPFILE')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='helpheight', abbreviation='hh',
-      short_desc=N_("minimum height of a new help window"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_hh',
-      defaults={if_true=20}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='helplang', abbreviation='hlg',
-      short_desc=N_("preferred help languages"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_hlg',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='hidden', abbreviation='hid',
-      short_desc=N_("don't unload buffer when it is |abandon|ed"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_hid',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='highlight', abbreviation='hl',
-      short_desc=N_("sets highlighting mode for various occasions"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_hl',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('HIGHLIGHT_INIT')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='history', abbreviation='hi',
-      short_desc=N_("number of command-lines that are remembered"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_hi',
-      defaults={if_true=10000}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='hkmap', abbreviation='hk',
-      short_desc=N_("Hebrew keyboard mapping"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_hkmap',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='hkmapp', abbreviation='hkp',
-      short_desc=N_("phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_hkmapp',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='hlsearch', abbreviation='hls',
-      short_desc=N_("highlight matches with last search pattern"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'all_windows'},
-      varname='p_hls',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='icon',
-      short_desc=N_("Vim set the text of the window icon"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_icon',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='iconstring',
-      short_desc=N_("to use for the Vim icon text"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      varname='p_iconstring',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='ignorecase', abbreviation='ic',
-      short_desc=N_("ignore case in search patterns"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ic',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='imcmdline', abbreviation='imc',
-      short_desc=N_("use IM when starting to edit a command line"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      enable_if=false,
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='imdisable', abbreviation='imd',
-      short_desc=N_("do not use the IM in any mode"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      enable_if=false,
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='iminsert', abbreviation='imi',
-      short_desc=N_("use :lmap or IM in Insert mode"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_iminsert', pv_name='p_imi',
-      defaults={
-        if_true=macros('B_IMODE_NONE'),
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='imsearch', abbreviation='ims',
-      short_desc=N_("use :lmap or IM when typing a search pattern"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_imsearch', pv_name='p_ims',
-      defaults={
-        if_true=macros('B_IMODE_USE_INSERT'),
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='inccommand', abbreviation='icm',
-      short_desc=N_("Live preview of substitution"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_icm',
-      defaults={if_true="nosplit"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='include', abbreviation='inc',
-      short_desc=N_("pattern to be used to find an include file"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_inc',
-      defaults={if_true="^\\s*#\\s*include"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='includeexpr', abbreviation='inex',
-      short_desc=N_("expression used to process an include line"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_inex',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='incsearch', abbreviation='is',
-      short_desc=N_("highlight match while typing search pattern"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_is',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='indentexpr', abbreviation='inde',
-      short_desc=N_("expression used to obtain the indent of a line"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_inde',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='indentkeys', abbreviation='indk',
-      short_desc=N_("keys that trigger indenting with 'indentexpr'"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_indk',
-      defaults={if_true=indentkeys_default}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='infercase', abbreviation='inf',
-      short_desc=N_("adjust case of match for keyword completion"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_inf',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='insertmode', abbreviation='im',
-      short_desc=N_("No description"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_force_off',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='isfname', abbreviation='isf',
-      short_desc=N_("characters included in file names and pathnames"),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_isf',
-      defaults={
-        condition='BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
-        -- Excluded are: & and ^ are special in cmd.exe
-        -- ( and ) are used in text separating fnames */
-        if_true="@,48-57,/,\\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,=",
-        if_false="@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='isident', abbreviation='isi',
-      short_desc=N_("characters included in identifiers"),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_isi',
-      defaults={
-        condition='MSWIN',
-        if_true="@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235",
-        if_false="@,48-57,_,192-255"
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='iskeyword', abbreviation='isk',
-      short_desc=N_("characters included in keywords"),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_isk',
-      defaults={if_true="@,48-57,_,192-255"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='isprint', abbreviation='isp',
-      short_desc=N_("printable characters"),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      redraw={'all_windows'},
-      varname='p_isp',
-      defaults={if_true="@,161-255"
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='joinspaces', abbreviation='js',
-      short_desc=N_("two spaces after a period with a join command"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_js',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='jumpoptions', abbreviation='jop',
-      short_desc=N_("Controls the behavior of the jumplist"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_jop',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='keymap', abbreviation='kmp',
-      short_desc=N_("name of a keyboard mapping"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      normal_fname_chars=true,
-      pri_mkrc=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines', 'current_buffer'},
-      varname='p_keymap', pv_name='p_kmap',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='keymodel', abbreviation='km',
-      short_desc=N_("enable starting/stopping selection with keys"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_km',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='keywordprg', abbreviation='kp',
-      short_desc=N_("program to use for the \"K\" command"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_kp',
-      defaults={
-        if_true=":Man",
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='langmap', abbreviation='lmap',
-      short_desc=N_("alphabetic characters for other language mode"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_langmap',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='langmenu', abbreviation='lm',
-      short_desc=N_("language to be used for the menus"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      normal_fname_chars=true,
-      varname='p_lm',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='langnoremap', abbreviation='lnr',
-      short_desc=N_("do not apply 'langmap' to mapped characters"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_lnr',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='langremap', abbreviation='lrm',
-      short_desc=N_('No description'),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_lrm',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='laststatus', abbreviation='ls',
-      short_desc=N_("tells when last window has status lines"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'all_windows'},
-      varname='p_ls',
-      defaults={if_true=2}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='lazyredraw', abbreviation='lz',
-      short_desc=N_("don't redraw while executing macros"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_lz',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='linebreak', abbreviation='lbr',
-      short_desc=N_("wrap long lines at a blank"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='lines',
-      short_desc=N_("of lines in the display"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      varname='p_lines',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('DFLT_ROWS')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='linespace', abbreviation='lsp',
-      short_desc=N_("number of pixel lines to use between characters"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_linespace',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='lisp',
-      short_desc=N_("indenting for Lisp"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_lisp',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='lispoptions', abbreviation='lop',
-      short_desc=N_("options for lisp indenting"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_lop', pv_name='p_lop',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='lispwords', abbreviation='lw',
-      short_desc=N_("words that change how lisp indenting works"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_lispwords', pv_name='p_lw',
-      defaults={if_true=macros('LISPWORD_VALUE')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='list',
-      short_desc=N_("<Tab> and <EOL>"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='listchars', abbreviation='lcs',
-      short_desc=N_("characters for displaying in list mode"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global', 'window'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      varname='p_lcs',
-      defaults={if_true="tab:> ,trail:-,nbsp:+"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='loadplugins', abbreviation='lpl',
-      short_desc=N_("load plugin scripts when starting up"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_lpl',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='magic',
-      short_desc=N_("special characters in search patterns"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_magic',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='makeef', abbreviation='mef',
-      short_desc=N_("name of the errorfile for \":make\""),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_mef',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='makeencoding', abbreviation='menc',
-      short_desc=N_("Converts the output of external commands"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      varname='p_menc',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='makeprg', abbreviation='mp',
-      short_desc=N_("program to use for the \":make\" command"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_mp',
-      defaults={if_true="make"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='matchpairs', abbreviation='mps',
-      short_desc=N_("pairs of characters that \"%\" can match"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_mps',
-      defaults={if_true="(:),{:},[:]"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='matchtime', abbreviation='mat',
-      short_desc=N_("tenths of a second to show matching paren"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mat',
-      defaults={if_true=5}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='maxcombine', abbreviation='mco',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum nr of combining characters displayed"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mco',
-      defaults={if_true=6}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='maxfuncdepth', abbreviation='mfd',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum recursive depth for user functions"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mfd',
-      defaults={if_true=100}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='maxmapdepth', abbreviation='mmd',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum recursive depth for mapping"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mmd',
-      defaults={if_true=1000}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='maxmempattern', abbreviation='mmp',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum memory (in Kbyte) used for pattern search"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mmp',
-      defaults={if_true=1000}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='menuitems', abbreviation='mis',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum number of items in a menu"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mis',
-      defaults={if_true=25}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='mkspellmem', abbreviation='msm',
-      short_desc=N_("memory used before |:mkspell| compresses the tree"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_msm',
-      defaults={if_true="460000,2000,500"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='modeline', abbreviation='ml',
-      short_desc=N_("recognize modelines at start or end of file"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_ml',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='modelineexpr', abbreviation='mle',
-      short_desc=N_("allow some options to be set in modeline"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_mle',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='modelines', abbreviation='mls',
-      short_desc=N_("number of lines checked for modelines"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mls',
-      defaults={if_true=5}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='modifiable', abbreviation='ma',
-      short_desc=N_("changes to the text are not possible"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      noglob=true,
-      varname='p_ma',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='modified', abbreviation='mod',
-      short_desc=N_("buffer has been modified"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_mod',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='more',
-      short_desc=N_("listings when the whole screen is filled"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_more',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='mouse',
-      short_desc=N_("the use of mouse clicks"),
-      type='string', list='flags', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mouse',
-      defaults={if_true="nvi"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='mousefocus', abbreviation='mousef',
-      short_desc=N_("keyboard focus follows the mouse"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_mousef',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='mousehide', abbreviation='mh',
-      short_desc=N_("hide mouse pointer while typing"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      enable_if=false,
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='mousemodel', abbreviation='mousem',
-      short_desc=N_("changes meaning of mouse buttons"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mousem',
-      defaults={if_true="popup_setpos"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='mousemoveevent', abbreviation='mousemev',
-      short_desc=N_("deliver mouse move events to input queue"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_mousemev',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='mousescroll',
-      short_desc=N_("amount to scroll by when scrolling with a mouse"),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'global'},
-      vi_def=true,
-      varname='p_mousescroll',
-      defaults={if_true="ver:3,hor:6"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='mouseshape', abbreviation='mouses',
-      short_desc=N_("shape of the mouse pointer in different modes"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      enable_if=false,
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='mousetime', abbreviation='mouset',
-      short_desc=N_("max time between mouse double-click"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_mouset',
-      defaults={if_true=500}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='nrformats', abbreviation='nf',
-      short_desc=N_("number formats recognized for CTRL-A command"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_nf',
-      defaults={if_true="bin,hex"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='number', abbreviation='nu',
-      short_desc=N_("print the line number in front of each line"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='numberwidth', abbreviation='nuw',
-      short_desc=N_("number of columns used for the line number"),
-      type='number', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=4}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='omnifunc', abbreviation='ofu',
-      short_desc=N_("function for filetype-specific completion"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      secure=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      func=true,
-      varname='p_ofu',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='opendevice', abbreviation='odev',
-      short_desc=N_("allow reading/writing devices on MS-Windows"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      enable_if=false,
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='operatorfunc', abbreviation='opfunc',
-      short_desc=N_("function to be called for |g@| operator"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      func=true,
-      varname='p_opfunc',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='packpath', abbreviation='pp',
-      short_desc=N_("list of directories used for packages"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_pp',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='paragraphs', abbreviation='para',
-      short_desc=N_("nroff macros that separate paragraphs"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_para',
-      defaults={if_true="IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='paste',
-      short_desc=N_("pasting text"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      pri_mkrc=true,
-      varname='p_paste',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='pastetoggle', abbreviation='pt',
-      short_desc=N_("key code that causes 'paste' to toggle"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_pt',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='patchexpr', abbreviation='pex',
-      short_desc=N_("expression used to patch a file"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_pex',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='patchmode', abbreviation='pm',
-      short_desc=N_("keep the oldest version of a file"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      normal_fname_chars=true,
-      varname='p_pm',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='path', abbreviation='pa',
-      short_desc=N_("list of directories searched with \"gf\" et.al."),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_path',
-      defaults={if_true=".,/usr/include,,"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='preserveindent', abbreviation='pi',
-      short_desc=N_("preserve the indent structure when reindenting"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_pi',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='previewheight', abbreviation='pvh',
-      short_desc=N_("height of the preview window"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_pvh',
-      defaults={if_true=12}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='previewwindow', abbreviation='pvw',
-      short_desc=N_("identifies the preview window"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      noglob=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='prompt',
-      short_desc=N_("enable prompt in Ex mode"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_force_on',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='pumblend', abbreviation='pb',
-      short_desc=N_("Controls transparency level of popup menu"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_pb',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='pumheight', abbreviation='ph',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum height of the popup menu"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ph',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='pumwidth', abbreviation='pw',
-      short_desc=N_("minimum width of the popup menu"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_pw',
-      defaults={if_true=15}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='pyxversion', abbreviation='pyx',
-      short_desc=N_("selects default python version to use"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_pyx',
-      defaults={if_true=3}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='quickfixtextfunc', abbreviation='qftf',
-      short_desc=N_("customize the quickfix window"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      func=true,
-      varname='p_qftf',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='quoteescape', abbreviation='qe',
-      short_desc=N_("escape characters used in a string"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_qe',
-      defaults={if_true="\\"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='readonly', abbreviation='ro',
-      short_desc=N_("disallow writing the buffer"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      noglob=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_ro',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='redrawdebug', abbreviation='rdb',
-      short_desc=N_("Changes the way redrawing works (debug)"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_rdb',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='redrawtime', abbreviation='rdt',
-      short_desc=N_("timeout for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_rdt',
-      defaults={if_true=2000}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='regexpengine', abbreviation='re',
-      short_desc=N_("default regexp engine to use"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_re',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='relativenumber', abbreviation='rnu',
-      short_desc=N_("show relative line number in front of each line"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='remap',
-      short_desc=N_("No description"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_force_on',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='report',
-      short_desc=N_("for reporting nr. of lines changed"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_report',
-      defaults={if_true=2}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='revins', abbreviation='ri',
-      short_desc=N_("inserting characters will work backwards"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ri',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='rightleft', abbreviation='rl',
-      short_desc=N_("window is right-to-left oriented"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='rightleftcmd', abbreviation='rlc',
-      short_desc=N_("commands for which editing works right-to-left"),
-      type='string', scope={'window'},
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true="search"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='ruler', abbreviation='ru',
-      short_desc=N_("show cursor line and column in the status line"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_ru',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='rulerformat', abbreviation='ruf',
-      short_desc=N_("custom format for the ruler"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      alloced=true,
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_ruf',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='runtimepath', abbreviation='rtp',
-      short_desc=N_("list of directories used for runtime files"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      expand='nodefault',
-      varname='p_rtp',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='scroll', abbreviation='scr',
-      short_desc=N_("lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D"),
-      type='number', scope={'window'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      pv_name='p_scroll',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='scrollback', abbreviation='scbk',
-      short_desc=N_("lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_scbk',
-      redraw={'current_buffer'},
-      defaults={if_true=-1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='scrollbind', abbreviation='scb',
-      short_desc=N_("scroll in window as other windows scroll"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      pv_name='p_scbind',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='scrolljump', abbreviation='sj',
-      short_desc=N_("minimum number of lines to scroll"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sj',
-      defaults={if_true=1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='scrolloff', abbreviation='so',
-      short_desc=N_("minimum nr. of lines above and below cursor"),
-      type='number', scope={'global', 'window'},
-      varname='p_so',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='scrollopt', abbreviation='sbo',
-      short_desc=N_("how 'scrollbind' should behave"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_sbo',
-      defaults={if_true="ver,jump"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='sections', abbreviation='sect',
-      short_desc=N_("nroff macros that separate sections"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sections',
-      defaults={if_true="SHNHH HUnhsh"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='secure',
-      short_desc=N_("No description"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_secure',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='selection', abbreviation='sel',
-      short_desc=N_("what type of selection to use"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sel',
-      defaults={if_true="inclusive"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='selectmode', abbreviation='slm',
-      short_desc=N_("when to use Select mode instead of Visual mode"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_slm',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='sessionoptions', abbreviation='ssop',
-      short_desc=N_("options for |:mksession|"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_ssop',
-      defaults={if_true="blank,buffers,curdir,folds,help,tabpages,winsize,terminal"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shada', abbreviation='sd',
-      short_desc=N_("use .shada file upon startup and exiting"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_shada',
-      defaults={if_true="!,'100,<50,s10,h"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shadafile', abbreviation='sdf',
-      short_desc=N_("overrides the filename used for shada"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_shadafile',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shell', abbreviation='sh',
-      short_desc=N_("name of shell to use for external commands"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_sh',
-      defaults={
-        condition='MSWIN',
-        if_true="cmd.exe",
-        if_false="sh"
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shellcmdflag', abbreviation='shcf',
-      short_desc=N_("flag to shell to execute one command"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_shcf',
-      defaults={
-        condition='MSWIN',
-        if_true="/s /c",
-        if_false="-c"
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shellpipe', abbreviation='sp',
-      short_desc=N_("string to put output of \":make\" in error file"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_sp',
-      defaults={
-        condition='MSWIN',
-        if_true=">%s 2>&1",
-        if_false="| tee",
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shellquote', abbreviation='shq',
-      short_desc=N_("quote character(s) for around shell command"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_shq',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shellredir', abbreviation='srr',
-      short_desc=N_("string to put output of filter in a temp file"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_srr',
-      defaults={
-        condition='MSWIN',
-        if_true=">%s 2>&1",
-        if_false=">"
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shellslash', abbreviation='ssl',
-      short_desc=N_("use forward slash for shell file names"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ssl',
-      enable_if='BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shelltemp', abbreviation='stmp',
-      short_desc=N_("whether to use a temp file for shell commands"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_stmp',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shellxquote', abbreviation='sxq',
-      short_desc=N_("like 'shellquote', but include redirection"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_sxq',
-      defaults={
-        condition='MSWIN',
-        if_true="\"",
-        if_false="",
-      }
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shellxescape', abbreviation='sxe',
-      short_desc=N_("characters to escape when 'shellxquote' is ("),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      varname='p_sxe',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shiftround', abbreviation='sr',
-      short_desc=N_("round indent to multiple of shiftwidth"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sr',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shiftwidth', abbreviation='sw',
-      short_desc=N_("number of spaces to use for (auto)indent step"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_sw',
-      defaults={if_true=8}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='shortmess', abbreviation='shm',
-      short_desc=N_("list of flags, reduce length of messages"),
-      type='string', list='flags', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_shm',
-      defaults={if_true="filnxtToOF"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='showbreak', abbreviation='sbr',
-      short_desc=N_("string to use at the start of wrapped lines"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'window'},
-      redraw={'all_windows'},
-      varname='p_sbr',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='showcmd', abbreviation='sc',
-      short_desc=N_("show (partial) command in status line"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sc',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='showcmdloc', abbreviation='sloc',
-      short_desc=N_("change location of partial command"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sloc',
-      defaults={if_true="last"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='showfulltag', abbreviation='sft',
-      short_desc=N_("show full tag pattern when completing tag"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sft',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='showmatch', abbreviation='sm',
-      short_desc=N_("briefly jump to matching bracket if insert one"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sm',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='showmode', abbreviation='smd',
-      short_desc=N_("message on status line to show current mode"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_smd',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='showtabline', abbreviation='stal',
-      short_desc=N_("tells when the tab pages line is displayed"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'all_windows', 'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_stal',
-      defaults={if_true=1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='sidescroll', abbreviation='ss',
-      short_desc=N_("minimum number of columns to scroll horizontal"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ss',
-      defaults={if_true=1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='sidescrolloff', abbreviation='siso',
-      short_desc=N_("min. nr. of columns to left and right of cursor"),
-      type='number', scope={'global', 'window'},
-      varname='p_siso',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='signcolumn', abbreviation='scl',
-      short_desc=N_("when to display the sign column"),
-      type='string', scope={'window'},
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true="auto"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='smartcase', abbreviation='scs',
-      short_desc=N_("no ignore case when pattern has uppercase"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_scs',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='smartindent', abbreviation='si',
-      short_desc=N_("smart autoindenting for C programs"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_si',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='smarttab', abbreviation='sta',
-      short_desc=N_("use 'shiftwidth' when inserting <Tab>"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sta',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='softtabstop', abbreviation='sts',
-      short_desc=N_("number of spaces that <Tab> uses while editing"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_sts',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='spell',
-      short_desc=N_("spell checking"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='spellcapcheck', abbreviation='spc',
-      short_desc=N_("pattern to locate end of a sentence"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_buffer'},
-      varname='p_spc',
-      defaults={if_true="[.?!]\\_[\\])'\"	 ]\\+"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='spellfile', abbreviation='spf',
-      short_desc=N_("files where |zg| and |zw| store words"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_spf',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='spelllang', abbreviation='spl',
-      short_desc=N_("language(s) to do spell checking for"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      expand=true,
-      redraw={'current_buffer'},
-      varname='p_spl',
-      defaults={if_true="en"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='spellsuggest', abbreviation='sps',
-      short_desc=N_("method(s) used to suggest spelling corrections"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_sps',
-      defaults={if_true="best"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='spelloptions', abbreviation='spo',
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_spo',
-      redraw={'current_buffer'},
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='splitbelow', abbreviation='sb',
-      short_desc=N_("new window from split is below the current one"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_sb',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='splitkeep', abbreviation='spk',
-      short_desc=N_("determines scroll behavior for split windows"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_spk',
-      defaults={if_true='cursor'}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='splitright', abbreviation='spr',
-      short_desc=N_("new window is put right of the current one"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_spr',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='startofline', abbreviation='sol',
-      short_desc=N_("commands move cursor to first non-blank in line"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      vim=false,
-      varname='p_sol',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='statuscolumn', abbreviation='stc',
-      short_desc=N_("custom format for the status column"),
-      type='string', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      secure=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='statusline', abbreviation='stl',
-      short_desc=N_("custom format for the status line"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'window'},
-      alloced=true,
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_stl',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='suffixes', abbreviation='su',
-      short_desc=N_("suffixes that are ignored with multiple match"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_su',
-      defaults={if_true=".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='suffixesadd', abbreviation='sua',
-      short_desc=N_("suffixes added when searching for a file"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_sua',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='swapfile', abbreviation='swf',
-      short_desc=N_("whether to use a swapfile for a buffer"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_swf',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='switchbuf', abbreviation='swb',
-      short_desc=N_("sets behavior when switching to another buffer"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_swb',
-      defaults={if_true="uselast"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='synmaxcol', abbreviation='smc',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum column to find syntax items"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      redraw={'current_buffer'},
-      varname='p_smc',
-      defaults={if_true=3000}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='syntax', abbreviation='syn',
-      short_desc=N_("syntax to be loaded for current buffer"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      noglob=true,
-      normal_fname_chars=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      varname='p_syn',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tagfunc', abbreviation='tfu',
-      short_desc=N_("function used to perform tag searches"),
-      type='string', scope={'buffer'},
-      secure=true,
-      func=true,
-      varname='p_tfu',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tabline', abbreviation='tal',
-      short_desc=N_("custom format for the console tab pages line"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      redraw={'tabline'},
-      varname='p_tal',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tabpagemax', abbreviation='tpm',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum number of tab pages for |-p| and \"tab all\""),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_tpm',
-      defaults={if_true=50}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tabstop', abbreviation='ts',
-      short_desc=N_("number of spaces that <Tab> in file uses"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      redraw={'current_buffer'},
-      varname='p_ts',
-      defaults={if_true=8}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tagbsearch', abbreviation='tbs',
-      short_desc=N_("use binary searching in tags files"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_tbs',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tagcase', abbreviation='tc',
-      short_desc=N_("how to handle case when searching in tags files"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      varname='p_tc',
-      defaults={if_true="followic"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='taglength', abbreviation='tl',
-      short_desc=N_("number of significant characters for a tag"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_tl',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tagrelative', abbreviation='tr',
-      short_desc=N_("file names in tag file are relative"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_tr',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tags', abbreviation='tag',
-      short_desc=N_("list of file names used by the tag command"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_tags',
-      defaults={if_true="./tags;,tags"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tagstack', abbreviation='tgst',
-      short_desc=N_("push tags onto the tag stack"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_tgst',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='termbidi', abbreviation='tbidi',
-      short_desc=N_("terminal takes care of bi-directionality"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_tbidi',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='termencoding', abbreviation='tenc',
-      short_desc=N_("Terminal encoding"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='termguicolors', abbreviation='tgc',
-      short_desc=N_("Terminal true color support"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_tgc',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='termpastefilter', abbreviation='tpf',
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_tpf',
-      defaults={if_true="BS,HT,ESC,DEL"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='terse',
-      short_desc=N_("No description"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_force_off',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='textwidth', abbreviation='tw',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum width of text that is being inserted"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      redraw={'current_buffer'},
-      varname='p_tw',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='thesaurus', abbreviation='tsr',
-      short_desc=N_("list of thesaurus files for keyword completion"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      normal_dname_chars=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_tsr',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='thesaurusfunc', abbreviation='tsrfu',
-      short_desc=N_("function used for thesaurus completion"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      secure=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      func=true,
-      varname='p_tsrfu',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='tildeop', abbreviation='top',
-      short_desc=N_("tilde command \"~\" behaves like an operator"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_to',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='timeout', abbreviation='to',
-      short_desc=N_("time out on mappings and key codes"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_timeout',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='timeoutlen', abbreviation='tm',
-      short_desc=N_("time out time in milliseconds"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_tm',
-      defaults={if_true=1000}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='title',
-      short_desc=N_("Vim set the title of the window"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_title',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='titlelen',
-      short_desc=N_("of 'columns' used for window title"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_titlelen',
-      defaults={if_true=85}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='titleold',
-      short_desc=N_("title, restored when exiting"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      varname='p_titleold',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='titlestring',
-      short_desc=N_("to use for the Vim window title"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      varname='p_titlestring',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='ttimeout',
-      short_desc=N_("out on mappings"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_ttimeout',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='ttimeoutlen', abbreviation='ttm',
-      short_desc=N_("time out time for key codes in milliseconds"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      redraw={'ui_option'},
-      varname='p_ttm',
-      defaults={if_true=50}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='ttyfast', abbreviation='tf',
-      short_desc=N_("No description"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      no_mkrc=true,
-      varname='p_force_on',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='undodir', abbreviation='udir',
-      short_desc=N_("where to store undo files"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      secure=true,
-      expand='nodefault',
-      varname='p_udir',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='undofile', abbreviation='udf',
-      short_desc=N_("save undo information in a file"),
-      type='bool', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_udf',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='undolevels', abbreviation='ul',
-      short_desc=N_("maximum number of changes that can be undone"),
-      type='number', scope={'global', 'buffer'},
-      varname='p_ul',
-      defaults={if_true=1000}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='undoreload', abbreviation='ur',
-      short_desc=N_("max nr of lines to save for undo on a buffer reload"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ur',
-      defaults={if_true=10000}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='updatecount', abbreviation='uc',
-      short_desc=N_("after this many characters flush swap file"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_uc',
-      defaults={if_true=200}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='updatetime', abbreviation='ut',
-      short_desc=N_("after this many milliseconds flush swap file"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ut',
-      defaults={if_true=4000}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='varsofttabstop', abbreviation='vsts',
-      short_desc=N_("list of numbers of spaces that <Tab> uses while editing"),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_vsts',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='vartabstop', abbreviation='vts',
-      short_desc=N_("list of numbers of spaces that <Tab> in file uses"),
-      type='string', list='comma', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_vts',
-      redraw={'current_buffer'},
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='verbose', abbreviation='vbs',
-      short_desc=N_("give informative messages"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_verbose', redraw={'ui_option'},
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='verbosefile', abbreviation='vfile',
-      short_desc=N_("file to write messages in"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand=true,
-      varname='p_vfile',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='viewdir', abbreviation='vdir',
-      short_desc=N_("directory where to store files with :mkview"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      secure=true,
-      expand='nodefault',
-      varname='p_vdir',
-      defaults={if_true=''}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='viewoptions', abbreviation='vop',
-      short_desc=N_("specifies what to save for :mkview"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_vop',
-      defaults={if_true="folds,cursor,curdir"}
-    },
-    {
-      -- Alias for "shada".
-      full_name='viminfo', abbreviation='vi',
-      short_desc=N_("Alias for shada"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'}, nodefault=true,
-    },
-    {
-      -- Alias for "shadafile".
-      full_name='viminfofile', abbreviation='vif',
-      short_desc=N_("Alias for shadafile instead"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'}, nodefault=true,
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='virtualedit', abbreviation='ve',
-      short_desc=N_("when to use virtual editing"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global', 'window'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      redraw={'curswant'},
-      varname='p_ve',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='visualbell', abbreviation='vb',
-      short_desc=N_("use visual bell instead of beeping"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_vb',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='warn',
-      short_desc=N_("for shell command when buffer was changed"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_warn',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='whichwrap', abbreviation='ww',
-      short_desc=N_("allow specified keys to cross line boundaries"),
-      type='string', list='flagscomma', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ww',
-      defaults={if_true="b,s"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wildchar', abbreviation='wc',
-      short_desc=N_("command-line character for wildcard expansion"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wc',
-      defaults={if_true=imacros('TAB')}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wildcharm', abbreviation='wcm',
-      short_desc=N_("like 'wildchar' but also works when mapped"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wcm',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wildignore', abbreviation='wig',
-      short_desc=N_("files matching these patterns are not completed"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_wig',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wildignorecase', abbreviation='wic',
-      short_desc=N_("ignore case when completing file names"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wic',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wildmenu', abbreviation='wmnu',
-      short_desc=N_("use menu for command line completion"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wmnu',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wildmode', abbreviation='wim',
-      short_desc=N_("mode for 'wildchar' command-line expansion"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=false,
-      varname='p_wim',
-      defaults={if_true="full"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wildoptions', abbreviation='wop',
-      short_desc=N_("specifies how command line completion is done"),
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'global'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      varname='p_wop',
-      defaults={if_true='pum,tagfile'}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winaltkeys', abbreviation='wak',
-      short_desc=N_("when the windows system handles ALT keys"),
-      type='string', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wak',
-      defaults={if_true="menu"}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winbar', abbreviation='wbr',
-      short_desc=N_("custom format for the window bar"),
-      type='string', scope={'global', 'window'},
-      alloced=true,
-      modelineexpr=true,
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      varname='p_wbr',
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winblend', abbreviation='winbl',
-      short_desc=N_("Controls transparency level for floating windows"),
-      type='number', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winhighlight', abbreviation='winhl',
-      short_desc=N_("Setup window-local highlights");
-      type='string', list='onecomma', scope={'window'},
-      deny_duplicates=true,
-      alloced=true,
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=""}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='window', abbreviation='wi',
-      short_desc=N_("nr of lines to scroll for CTRL-F and CTRL-B"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_window',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winheight', abbreviation='wh',
-      short_desc=N_("minimum number of lines for the current window"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wh',
-      defaults={if_true=1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winfixheight', abbreviation='wfh',
-      short_desc=N_("keep window height when opening/closing windows"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winfixwidth', abbreviation='wfw',
-      short_desc=N_("keep window width when opening/closing windows"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'statuslines'},
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winminheight', abbreviation='wmh',
-      short_desc=N_("minimum number of lines for any window"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wmh',
-      defaults={if_true=1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winminwidth', abbreviation='wmw',
-      short_desc=N_("minimal number of columns for any window"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wmw',
-      defaults={if_true=1}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='winwidth', abbreviation='wiw',
-      short_desc=N_("minimal number of columns for current window"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wiw',
-      defaults={if_true=20}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wrap',
-      short_desc=N_("lines wrap and continue on the next line"),
-      type='bool', scope={'window'},
-      redraw={'current_window'},
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wrapmargin', abbreviation='wm',
-      short_desc=N_("chars from the right where wrapping starts"),
-      type='number', scope={'buffer'},
-      varname='p_wm',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='wrapscan', abbreviation='ws',
-      short_desc=N_("searches wrap around the end of the file"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_ws',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='write',
-      short_desc=N_("to a file is allowed"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_write',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='writeany', abbreviation='wa',
-      short_desc=N_("write to file with no need for \"!\" override"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wa',
-      defaults={if_true=false}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='writebackup', abbreviation='wb',
-      short_desc=N_("make a backup before overwriting a file"),
-      type='bool', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wb',
-      defaults={if_true=true}
-    },
-    {
-      full_name='writedelay', abbreviation='wd',
-      short_desc=N_("delay this many msec for each char (for debug)"),
-      type='number', scope={'global'},
-      varname='p_wd',
-      defaults={if_true=0}
-    },
-  }
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A list of file patterns.  When one of the patterns matches with the
+        name of the file which is written, no backup file is created.  Both
+        the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
+        The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-pattern|.
+        Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
+        When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
+        default value.  "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.
+
+        WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write
+        your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
+        lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only disable
+        backups if you don't care about losing the file.
+
+        Note that environment variables are not expanded.  If you want to use
+        $HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: >vim
+        	:let &backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') .. '/tmp/*'
+
+        <	Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a
+        backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see
+        the newly created file).  Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'backupskip',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('no backup for files that match these patterns'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_bsk',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bo',
+      cb = 'did_set_belloff',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'all' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Specifies for which events the bell will not be rung. It is a comma-
+        separated list of items. For each item that is present, the bell
+        will be silenced. This is most useful to specify specific events in
+        insert mode to be silenced.
+
+        item	    meaning when present	~
+        all	    All events.
+        backspace   When hitting <BS> or <Del> and deleting results in an
+        	    error.
+        cursor	    Fail to move around using the cursor keys or
+        	    <PageUp>/<PageDown> in |Insert-mode|.
+        complete    Error occurred when using |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| or
+        	    |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.
+        copy	    Cannot copy char from insert mode using |i_CTRL-Y| or
+        	    |i_CTRL-E|.
+        ctrlg	    Unknown Char after <C-G> in Insert mode.
+        error	    Other Error occurred (e.g. try to join last line)
+        	    (mostly used in |Normal-mode| or |Cmdline-mode|).
+        esc	    hitting <Esc> in |Normal-mode|.
+        hangul	    Ignored.
+        lang	    Calling the beep module for Lua/Mzscheme/TCL.
+        mess	    No output available for |g<|.
+        showmatch   Error occurred for 'showmatch' function.
+        operator    Empty region error |cpo-E|.
+        register    Unknown register after <C-R> in |Insert-mode|.
+        shell	    Bell from shell output |:!|.
+        spell	    Error happened on spell suggest.
+        wildmode    More matches in |cmdline-completion| available
+        	    (depends on the 'wildmode' setting).
+
+        This is most useful to fine tune when in Insert mode the bell should
+        be rung. For Normal mode and Ex commands, the bell is often rung to
+        indicate that an error occurred. It can be silenced by adding the
+        "error" keyword.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_belloff',
+      full_name = 'belloff',
+      list = 'comma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('do not ring the bell for these reasons'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_bo',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bin',
+      cb = 'did_set_binary',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option should be set before editing a binary file.  You can also
+        use the |-b| Vim argument.  When this option is switched on a few
+        options will be changed (also when it already was on):
+        	'textwidth'  will be set to 0
+        	'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
+        	'modeline'   will be off
+        	'expandtab'  will be off
+        Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
+        file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
+        separates lines).
+        The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
+        file is read without conversion.
+        NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
+        on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
+        'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing.  You might want to set
+        'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
+        The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
+        'bin' is switched from on to off.  Each buffer has its own set of
+        saved option values.
+        To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
+        This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
+        files you edit.
+        When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
+        there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
+        the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer).  See
+        the 'endofline' option.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'binary',
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('read/write/edit file in binary mode'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_bin',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
+        Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
+        - this option is on
+        - the 'binary' option is off
+        - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
+          endian variants.
+        Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
+        Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows.  For other applications it
+        causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
+        appear halfway through the resulting file.  Gcc doesn't accept a BOM.
+        When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
+        check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
+        Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
+        don't see it when editing.  When you don't change the options, the BOM
+        will be restored when writing the file.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'bomb',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('a Byte Order Mark to the file'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_bomb',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'brk',
+      cb = 'did_set_breakat',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = ' \t!@*-+;:,./?',
+        doc = '" ^I!@*-+;:,./?"',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
+        break if 'linebreak' is on.  Only works for ASCII characters.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'breakat',
+      list = 'flags',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('characters that may cause a line break'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_breakat',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bri',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Every wrapped line will continue visually indented (same amount of
+        space as the beginning of that line), thus preserving horizontal blocks
+        of text.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'breakindent',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('wrapped line repeats indent'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'briopt',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_breakindentopt',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Settings for 'breakindent'. It can consist of the following optional
+        items and must be separated by a comma:
+        	min:{n}	    Minimum text width that will be kept after
+        		    applying 'breakindent', even if the resulting
+        		    text should normally be narrower. This prevents
+        		    text indented almost to the right window border
+        		    occupying lot of vertical space when broken.
+        		    (default: 20)
+        	shift:{n}   After applying 'breakindent', the wrapped line's
+        		    beginning will be shifted by the given number of
+        		    characters.  It permits dynamic French paragraph
+        		    indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line
+        		    continuation (positive).
+        		    (default: 0)
+        	sbr	    Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the
+        		    additional indent.
+        		    (default: off)
+        	list:{n}    Adds an additional indent for lines that match a
+        		    numbered or bulleted list (using the
+        		    'formatlistpat' setting).
+        	list:-1	    Uses the length of a match with 'formatlistpat'
+        		    for indentation.
+        		    (default: 0)
+        	column:{n}  Indent at column {n}. Will overrule the other
+        		    sub-options. Note: an additional indent may be
+        		    added for the 'showbreak' setting.
+        		    (default: off)
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_breakindentopt',
+      full_name = 'breakindentopt',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_("settings for 'breakindent'"),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bsdir',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = '',
+        doc = '"last"',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Which directory to use for the file browser:
+           last		Use same directory as with last file browser, where a
+        		file was opened or saved.
+           buffer	Use the directory of the related buffer.
+           current	Use the current directory.
+           {path}	Use the specified directory
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = false,
+      full_name = 'browsedir',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('which directory to start browsing in'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bh',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_bufhidden',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
+        displayed in a window:
+          <empty>	follow the global 'hidden' option
+          hide		hide the buffer (don't unload it), even if 'hidden' is
+        		not set
+          unload	unload the buffer, even if 'hidden' is set; the
+        		|:hide| command will also unload the buffer
+          delete	delete the buffer from the buffer list, even if
+        		'hidden' is set; the |:hide| command will also delete
+        		the buffer, making it behave like |:bdelete|
+          wipe		wipe the buffer from the buffer list, even if
+        		'hidden' is set; the |:hide| command will also wipe
+        		out the buffer, making it behave like |:bwipeout|
+
+        CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
+        are lost without a warning.  Also, these values may break autocommands
+        that switch between buffers temporarily.
+        This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
+        special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_bufhidden',
+      full_name = 'bufhidden',
+      noglob = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('what to do when buffer is no longer in window'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_bh',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bl',
+      cb = 'did_set_buflisted',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list.  If
+        it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
+        This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
+        a file name or marks.  Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
+        But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'buflisted',
+      noglob = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('whether the buffer shows up in the buffer list'),
+      tags = { 'E85' },
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_bl',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'bt',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_buftype',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
+          <empty>	normal buffer
+          acwrite	buffer will always be written with |BufWriteCmd|s
+          help		help buffer (do not set this manually)
+          nofile	buffer is not related to a file, will not be written
+          nowrite	buffer will not be written
+          quickfix	list of errors |:cwindow| or locations |:lwindow|
+          terminal	|terminal-emulator| buffer
+          prompt	buffer where only the last line can be edited, meant
+        		to be used by a plugin, see |prompt-buffer|
+
+        This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
+        specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
+        Also see |win_gettype()|, which returns the type of the window.
+
+        Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
+        One such effect is that Vim will not check the timestamp of the file,
+        if the file is changed by another program this will not be noticed.
+
+        A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location
+        list.  This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and
+        you are not supposed to change it.
+
+        "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
+        both:		The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
+        		work (":w filename" does work though).
+        both:		The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|.
+        		There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
+        		example when you quit Vim.
+        both:		A swap file is only created when using too much memory
+        		(when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
+        		file).
+        nofile only:	The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
+        		file name.  It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
+        		command.
+        both:		When using ":e bufname" and already editing "bufname"
+        		the buffer is made empty and autocommands are
+        		triggered as usual for |:edit|.
+        						*E676*
+        "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like
+        "nofile", but it will be written.  Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and
+        "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned
+        without saving.  For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|,
+        |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_buftype',
+      full_name = 'buftype',
+      noglob = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      tags = { 'E382' },
+      short_desc = N_('special type of buffer'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_bt',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cmp',
+      cb = 'did_set_casemap',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'internal,keepascii' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Specifies details about changing the case of letters.  It may contain
+        these words, separated by a comma:
+        internal	Use internal case mapping functions, the current
+        		locale does not change the case mapping. When
+        		"internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower()
+        		system library functions are used when available.
+        keepascii	For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
+        		case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
+        		This probably only matters for Turkish.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_casemap',
+      full_name = 'casemap',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('specifies how case of letters is changed'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cmp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cdh',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, |:cd|, |:tcd| and |:lcd| without an argument changes the
+        current working directory to the |$HOME| directory like in Unix.
+        When off, those commands just print the current directory name.
+        On Unix this option has no effect.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cdhome',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_(':cd without argument goes to the home directory'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_cdh',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cd',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = ',,',
+        doc = 'equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,"',
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
+        |:cd|, |:tcd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being
+        searched for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with
+        "/", "./" or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then.
+        The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
+        |'path'|.  Also see |file-searching|.
+        The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
+        in the current directory first.
+        If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
+        a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
+        override it: >
+          :let &cdpath = ',' .. substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
+        <	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+        (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'cdpath',
+      list = 'comma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('list of directories searched with ":cd"'),
+      tags = { 'E344', 'E346' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cdpath',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_cedit',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = macros('CTRL_F_STR'),
+        doc = 'CTRL-F',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
+        Only non-printable keys are allowed.
+        The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
+        type.  The preferred way is to use the <> notation.  Examples: >
+        	:exe "set cedit=\\<C-Y>"
+        	:exe "set cedit=\\<Esc>"
+        <	|Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
+        See |cmdwin|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cedit',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('used to open the command-line window'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cedit',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        |channel| connected to the buffer, or 0 if no channel is connected.
+        In a |:terminal| buffer this is the terminal channel.
+        Read-only.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'channel',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      nodefault = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('Channel connected to the buffer'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_channel',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ccv',
+      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        An expression that is used for character encoding conversion.  It is
+        evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
+        different encoding from what is desired.
+        'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
+        supported and is able to do the conversion.  Using iconv() is
+        preferred, because it is much faster.
+        'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
+        file to convert from.  You will have to save the text in a file first.
+        The expression must return zero, false or an empty string for success,
+        non-zero or true for failure.
+        See |encoding-names| for possible encoding names.
+        Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
+        used.
+        Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
+        is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
+        Also used for Unicode conversion.
+        Example: >
+        	set charconvert=CharConvert()
+        	fun CharConvert()
+        	  system("recode "
+        		\ .. v:charconvert_from .. ".." .. v:charconvert_to
+        		\ .. " <" .. v:fname_in .. " >" .. v:fname_out)
+        	  return v:shell_error
+        	endfun
+        <	The related Vim variables are:
+        	v:charconvert_from	name of the current encoding
+        	v:charconvert_to	name of the desired encoding
+        	v:fname_in		name of the input file
+        	v:fname_out		name of the output file
+        Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'charconvert',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('expression for character encoding conversion'),
+      type = 'string',
+      tags = { 'E202', 'E214', 'E513' },
+      varname = 'p_ccv',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cin',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Enables automatic C program indenting.  See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
+        that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
+        preferred indent style.
+        If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
+        If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
+        the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
+        external program.
+        See |C-indenting|.
+        When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
+        option or 'indentexpr'.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cindent',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('do C program indenting'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_cin',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cink',
+      alloced = true,
+      defaults = { if_true = '0{,0},0),0],:,0#,!^F,o,O,e' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
+        the current line.  Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
+        empty.
+        For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
+        See |C-indenting|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cinkeys',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_("keys that trigger indent when 'cindent' is set"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cink',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cino',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_cinoptions',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
+        program.  See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
+        |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cinoptions',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_("how to do indenting when 'cindent' is set"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cino',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cinw',
+      alloced = true,
+      defaults = { if_true = 'if,else,while,do,for,switch' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
+        'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set.  For 'cindent' this is only done at
+        an appropriate place (inside {}).
+        Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'.  If case doesn't
+        matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
+        "if,If,IF".
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cinwords',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_("words where 'si' and 'cin' add an indent"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cinw',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cinsd',
+      alloced = true,
+      defaults = { if_true = 'public,protected,private' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Keywords that are interpreted as a C++ scope declaration by |cino-g|.
+        Useful e.g. for working with the Qt framework that defines additional
+        scope declarations "signals", "public slots" and "private slots": >
+        	set cinscopedecls+=signals,public\ slots,private\ slots
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cinscopedecls',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_("words that are recognized by 'cino-g'"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cinsd',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cb',
+      cb = 'did_set_clipboard',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option is a list of comma-separated names.
+        These names are recognized:
+
+        					*clipboard-unnamed*
+        unnamed		When included, Vim will use the clipboard register "*"
+        		for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
+        		would normally go to the unnamed register.  When a
+        		register is explicitly specified, it will always be
+        		used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
+        		or not.  The clipboard register can always be
+        		explicitly accessed using the "* notation.  Also see
+        		|clipboard|.
+
+        					*clipboard-unnamedplus*
+        unnamedplus	A variant of the "unnamed" flag which uses the
+        		clipboard register "+" (|quoteplus|) instead of
+        		register "*" for all yank, delete, change and put
+        		operations which would normally go to the unnamed
+        		register.  When "unnamed" is also included to the
+        		option, yank and delete operations (but not put)
+        		will additionally copy the text into register
+        		"*". See |clipboard|.
+      ]=],
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_clipboard',
+      full_name = 'clipboard',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('use the clipboard as the unnamed register'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cb',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ch',
+      cb = 'did_set_cmdheight',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Number of screen lines to use for the command-line.  Helps avoiding
+        |hit-enter| prompts.
+        The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab
+        page can have a different value.
+
+        When 'cmdheight' is zero, there is no command-line unless it is being
+        used.  The command-line will cover the last line of the screen when
+        shown.
+
+        WARNING: `cmdheight=0` is considered experimental. Expect some
+        unwanted behaviour. Some 'shortmess' flags and similar
+        mechanism might fail to take effect, causing unwanted hit-enter
+        prompts.  Some informative messages, both from Nvim itself and
+        plugins, will not be displayed.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cmdheight',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of lines to use for the command-line'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_ch',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cwh',
+      defaults = { if_true = 7 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cmdwinheight',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('height of the command-line window'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_cwh',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cc',
+      cb = 'did_set_colorcolumn',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        'colorcolumn' is a comma-separated list of screen columns that are
+        highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|.  Useful to align
+        text.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
+        The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with
+        '+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. >
+
+        	:set cc=+1	  " highlight column after 'textwidth'
+        	:set cc=+1,+2,+3  " highlight three columns after 'textwidth'
+        	:hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey
+        <
+        When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used.
+        A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'colorcolumn',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('columns to highlight'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'co',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = macros('DFLT_COLS'),
+        doc = '80 or terminal width',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Number of columns of the screen.  Normally this is set by the terminal
+        initialization and does not have to be set by hand.
+        When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
+        option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
+        to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |ginit.vim| file.
+        When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
+        number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.  For
+        the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to
+        what fits on the screen.  You can use this command to get the widest
+        window possible: >
+        	:set columns=9999
+        <	Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'columns',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of columns in the display'),
+      tags = { 'E594' },
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_columns',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'com',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_comments',
+      defaults = { if_true = 's1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-,fb:•' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A comma-separated list of strings that can start a comment line.  See
+        |format-comments|.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
+        insert a space.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'comments',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'curswant' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('patterns that can start a comment line'),
+      tags = { 'E524', 'E525' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_com',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cms',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_commentstring',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        A template for a comment.  The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
+        comment text.  For example, C uses "/*%s*/". Currently only used to
+        add markers for folding, see |fold-marker|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'commentstring',
+      redraw = { 'curswant' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('template for comments; used for fold marker'),
+      tags = { 'E537' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cms',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cp',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      full_name = 'compatible',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      immutable = true,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cpt',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_complete',
+      defaults = { if_true = '.,w,b,u,t' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works
+        when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used.  It is also used for whole-line
+        completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|.  It indicates the type of completion
+        and the places to scan.  It is a comma-separated list of flags:
+        .	scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
+        w	scan buffers from other windows
+        b	scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
+        u	scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
+        U	scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
+        k	scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
+        kspell  use the currently active spell checking |spell|
+        k{dict}	scan the file {dict}.  Several "k" flags can be given,
+        	patterns are valid too.  For example: >
+        		:set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
+        <	s	scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
+        s{tsr}	scan the file {tsr}.  Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
+        	are valid too.
+        i	scan current and included files
+        d	scan current and included files for defined name or macro
+        	|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
+        ]	tag completion
+        t	same as "]"
+        f	scan the buffer names (as opposed to buffer contents)
+
+        Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
+        not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
+        (gzipped files for example).  Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
+        whole-line completion.
+
+        As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'-
+        based expansion (e.g., dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns
+        |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions).
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_complete',
+      full_name = 'complete',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('specify how Insert mode completion works'),
+      tags = { 'E535' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cpt',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cocu',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_concealcursor',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed.
+        When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in
+        other lines.
+          n		Normal mode
+          v		Visual mode
+          i		Insert mode
+          c		Command line editing, for 'incsearch'
+
+        'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor.
+        A useful value is "nc".  This is used in help files.  So long as you
+        are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text
+        or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that
+        you can see what you are doing.
+        Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's
+        displayed.  E.g., when moving vertically it may change column.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_concealcursor',
+      full_name = 'concealcursor',
+      list = 'flags',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('whether concealable text is hidden in cursor line'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cole',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal|
+        is shown:
+
+        Value		Effect ~
+        0		Text is shown normally
+        1		Each block of concealed text is replaced with one
+        		character.  If the syntax item does not have a custom
+        		replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the
+        		character defined in 'listchars' is used.
+        		It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group.
+        2		Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a
+        		custom replacement character defined (see
+        		|:syn-cchar|).
+        3		Concealed text is completely hidden.
+
+        Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can
+        edit and copy the text.  This can be changed with the 'concealcursor'
+        option.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'conceallevel',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('whether concealable text is shown or hidden'),
+      type = 'number',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cfu',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_completefunc',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion
+        with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
+        See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
+        invoked and what it should return.  The value can be the name of a
+        function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|. See |option-value-function| for
+        more information.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'completefunc',
+      func = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('function to be used for Insert mode completion'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cfu',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cot',
+      cb = 'did_set_completeopt',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'menu,preview' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A comma-separated list of options for Insert mode completion
+        |ins-completion|.  The supported values are:
+
+           menu	    Use a popup menu to show the possible completions.  The
+        	    menu is only shown when there is more than one match and
+        	    sufficient colors are available.  |ins-completion-menu|
+
+           menuone  Use the popup menu also when there is only one match.
+        	    Useful when there is additional information about the
+        	    match, e.g., what file it comes from.
+
+           longest  Only insert the longest common text of the matches.  If
+        	    the menu is displayed you can use CTRL-L to add more
+        	    characters.  Whether case is ignored depends on the kind
+        	    of completion.  For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option is
+        	    used.
+
+           preview  Show extra information about the currently selected
+        	    completion in the preview window.  Only works in
+        	    combination with "menu" or "menuone".
+
+          noinsert  Do not insert any text for a match until the user selects
+        	    a match from the menu. Only works in combination with
+        	    "menu" or "menuone". No effect if "longest" is present.
+
+          noselect  Do not select a match in the menu, force the user to
+        	    select one from the menu. Only works in combination with
+        	    "menu" or "menuone".
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_completeopt',
+      full_name = 'completeopt',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('options for Insert mode completion'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cot',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'csl',
+      cb = 'did_set_completeslash',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        		only for MS-Windows
+        When this option is set it overrules 'shellslash' for completion:
+        - When this option is set to "slash", a forward slash is used for path
+          completion in insert mode. This is useful when editing HTML tag, or
+          Makefile with 'noshellslash' on MS-Windows.
+        - When this option is set to "backslash", backslash is used. This is
+          useful when editing a batch file with 'shellslash' set on MS-Windows.
+        - When this option is empty, same character is used as for
+          'shellslash'.
+        For Insert mode completion the buffer-local value is used.  For
+        command line completion the global value is used.
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = 'BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_completeslash',
+      full_name = 'completeslash',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_csl',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cf',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
+        fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
+        instead raise a dialog asking if you wish to save the current
+        file(s).  You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
+        If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
+        command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
+        command.
+        Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'confirm',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('ask what to do about unsaved/read-only files'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_confirm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ci',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
+        new line.  Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
+        tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled,
+        in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option makes the
+        new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
+        existing line.  'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab
+        remains a Tab.  If the new indent is greater than on the existing
+        line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
+        See 'preserveindent'.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'copyindent',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_("make 'autoindent' use existing indent structure"),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ci',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cpo',
+      cb = 'did_set_cpoptions',
+      defaults = { if_true = macros('CPO_VIM') },
+      desc = [=[
+        A sequence of single character flags.  When a character is present
+        this indicates Vi-compatible behavior.  This is used for things where
+        not being Vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
+        'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
+        Commas can be added for readability.
+        To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
+        "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
+
+            contains	behavior	~
+        							*cpo-a*
+        	a	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
+        		argument will set the alternate file name for the
+        		current window.
+        							*cpo-A*
+        	A	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
+        		argument will set the alternate file name for the
+        		current window.
+        							*cpo-b*
+        	b	"\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
+        		the map command.  The '\' is included in the mapping,
+        		the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
+        		command.  Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
+        		include the '|' in the mapping.  Applies to all
+        		mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
+        		See also |map_bar|.
+        							*cpo-B*
+        	B	A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
+        		abbreviations, user commands and the "to" part of the
+        		menu commands.  Remove this flag to be able to use a
+        		backslash like a CTRL-V.  For example, the command
+        		":map X \\<Esc>" results in X being mapped to:
+        			'B' included:	"\^["	 (^[ is a real <Esc>)
+        			'B' excluded:	"<Esc>"  (5 characters)
+        							*cpo-c*
+        	c	Searching continues at the end of any match at the
+        		cursor position, but not further than the start of the
+        		next line.  When not present searching continues
+        		one character from the cursor position.  With 'c'
+        		"abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
+        		"/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
+        							*cpo-C*
+        	C	Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
+        		backslash.  See |line-continuation|.
+        							*cpo-d*
+        	d	Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
+        		the tags file relative to the current file, but the
+        		tags file in the current directory.
+        							*cpo-D*
+        	D	Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
+        		commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
+        		|t|.
+        							*cpo-e*
+        	e	When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
+        		<CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
+        		linewise.  If this flag is not present, the register
+        		is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
+        		<CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
+        		and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
+        							*cpo-E*
+        	E	It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
+        		"gU" on an Empty region.  The operators only work when
+        		at least one character is to be operated on.  Example:
+        		This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
+        							*cpo-f*
+        	f	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
+        		argument will set the file name for the current buffer,
+        		if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet.
+        							*cpo-F*
+        	F	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
+        		argument will set the file name for the current
+        		buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
+        		yet.  Also see |cpo-P|.
+        							*cpo-i*
+        	i	When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
+        		leave it modified.
+        							*cpo-I*
+        	I	When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting
+        		indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.
+        							*cpo-J*
+        	J	A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
+        		the '.', '!' or '?'.  A <Tab> is not recognized as
+        		white space.
+        							*cpo-K*
+        	K	Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
+        		halfway through a mapping.  This breaks mapping
+        		<F1><F1> when only part of the second <F1> has been
+        		read.  It enables cancelling the mapping by typing
+        		<F1><Esc>.
+        							*cpo-l*
+        	l	Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
+        		literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special.
+        		See |/[]|
+        		   'l' included: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
+        		   'l' excluded: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space> and <Tab>
+        							*cpo-L*
+        	L	When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
+        		'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
+        		(see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
+        		the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
+        							*cpo-m*
+        	m	When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
+        		second.  When not included, a showmatch will wait half
+        		a second or until a character is typed.  |'showmatch'|
+        							*cpo-M*
+        	M	When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
+        		account.  Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
+        		parenthesis match.  When included "%" ignores
+        		backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
+        							*cpo-n*
+        	n	When included, the column used for 'number' and
+        		'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped
+        		lines.
+        							*cpo-o*
+        	o	Line offset to search command is not remembered for
+        		next search.
+        							*cpo-O*
+        	O	Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
+        		when it didn't exist when editing it.  This is a
+        		protection against a file unexpectedly created by
+        		someone else.  Vi didn't complain about this.
+        							*cpo-p*
+        	p	Vi compatible Lisp indenting.  When not present, a
+        		slightly better algorithm is used.
+        							*cpo-P*
+        	P	When included, a ":write" command that appends to a
+        		file will set the file name for the current buffer, if
+        		the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and
+        		the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|.
+        							*cpo-q*
+        	q	When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the
+        		position where it would be when joining two lines.
+        							*cpo-r*
+        	r	Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
+        		command, instead of the actually used search string.
+        							*cpo-R*
+        	R	Remove marks from filtered lines.  Without this flag
+        		marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
+        							*cpo-s*
+        	s	Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
+        		first time.  This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
+        		And it is the default.  If not present the options are
+        		set when the buffer is created.
+        							*cpo-S*
+        	S	Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
+        		(except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
+        		'syntax').  This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
+        		The options are set to the values in the current
+        		buffer.  When you change an option and go to another
+        		buffer, the value is copied.  Effectively makes the
+        		buffer options global to all buffers.
+
+        		's'    'S'     copy buffer options
+        		no     no      when buffer created
+        		yes    no      when buffer first entered (default)
+        		 X     yes     each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
+        							*cpo-t*
+        	t	Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
+        		"n" command.  Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
+        		the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
+        		last used search pattern.
+        							*cpo-u*
+        	u	Undo is Vi compatible.  See |undo-two-ways|.
+        							*cpo-v*
+        	v	Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
+        		Insert mode.  Without this flag the characters are
+        		erased from the screen right away.  With this flag the
+        		screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
+        		characters.
+        							*cpo-W*
+        	W	Don't overwrite a readonly file.  When omitted, ":w!"
+        		overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
+        							*cpo-x*
+        	x	<Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
+        		The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
+        		because <Esc> normally aborts a command.  |c_<Esc>|
+        							*cpo-X*
+        	X	When using a count with "R" the replaced text is
+        		deleted only once.  Also when repeating "R" with "."
+        		and a count.
+        							*cpo-y*
+        	y	A yank command can be redone with ".".  Think twice if
+        		you really want to use this, it may break some
+        		plugins, since most people expect "." to only repeat a
+        		change.
+        							*cpo-Z*
+        	Z	When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set,
+        		don't reset 'readonly'.
+        							*cpo-!*
+        	!	When redoing a filter command, use the last used
+        		external command, whatever it was.  Otherwise the last
+        		used -filter- command is used.
+        							*cpo-$*
+        	$	When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
+        		line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
+        		The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
+        		new text.  The line is redisplayed if you type any
+        		command that moves the cursor from the insertion
+        		point.
+        							*cpo-%*
+        	%	Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
+        		Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
+        		Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
+        		Parens inside single and double quotes are also
+        		counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
+        		disturb the matching.  For example, in a line like
+        		"if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
+        		match the last one.  When this flag is not included,
+        		parens inside single and double quotes are treated
+        		specially.  When matching a paren outside of quotes,
+        		everything inside quotes is ignored.  When matching a
+        		paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
+        		there is one).  This works very well for C programs.
+        		This flag is also used for other features, such as
+        		C-indenting.
+        							*cpo-+*
+        	+	When included, a ":write file" command will reset the
+        		'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer
+        		itself may still be different from its file.
+        							*cpo->*
+        	>	When appending to a register, put a line break before
+        		the appended text.
+        							*cpo-;*
+        	;	When using |,| or |;| to repeat the last |t| search
+        		and the cursor is right in front of the searched
+        		character, the cursor won't move. When not included,
+        		the cursor would skip over it and jump to the
+        		following occurrence.
+        							*cpo-_*
+        	_	When using |cw| on a word, do not include the
+        		whitespace following the word in the motion.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_cpoptions',
+      full_name = 'cpoptions',
+      list = 'flags',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('flags for Vi-compatible behavior'),
+      tags = { 'cpo' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_cpo',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'crb',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When this option is set, as the cursor in the current
+        window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have
+        this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and
+        column.  This option is useful for viewing the
+        differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode,
+        inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are
+        taken into account.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cursorbind',
+      pv_name = 'p_crbind',
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('move cursor in window as it moves in other windows'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cuc',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn
+        |hl-CursorColumn|.  Useful to align text.  Will make screen redrawing
+        slower.
+        If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use
+        these autocommands: >
+        	au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn
+        	au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cursorcolumn',
+      redraw = { 'current_window_only' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('highlight the screen column of the cursor'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'cul',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Highlight the text line of the cursor with CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
+        Useful to easily spot the cursor.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
+        When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it
+        easier to see the selected text.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'cursorline',
+      redraw = { 'current_window_only' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('highlight the screen line of the cursor'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'culopt',
+      cb = 'did_set_cursorlineopt',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'both' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Comma-separated list of settings for how 'cursorline' is displayed.
+        Valid values:
+        "line"		Highlight the text line of the cursor with
+        		CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
+        "screenline"	Highlight only the screen line of the cursor with
+        		CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
+        "number"	Highlight the line number of the cursor with
+        		CursorLineNr |hl-CursorLineNr|.
+
+        Special value:
+        "both"		Alias for the values "line,number".
+
+        "line" and "screenline" cannot be used together.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_cursorlineopt',
+      full_name = 'cursorlineopt',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'current_window_only' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_("settings for 'cursorline'"),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_debug',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        These values can be used:
+        msg	Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
+        	anyway.
+        throw	Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
+        	anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|.
+        beep	A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be
+        	produced.
+        The values can be combined, separated by a comma.
+        "msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or
+        'indentexpr'.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_debug',
+      full_name = 'debug',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('to "msg" to see all error messages'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_debug',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'def',
+      alloced = true,
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Pattern to be used to find a macro definition.  It is a search
+        pattern, just like for the "/" command.  This option is used for the
+        commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|.  The 'isident' option is
+        used to recognize the defined name after the match: >
+        	{match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
+        <	See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
+        or backslash.
+        For C++ this value would be useful, to include const type declarations: >
+        	^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
+        <	You can also use "\ze" just before the name and continue the pattern
+        to check what is following.  E.g. for Javascript, if a function is
+        defined with `func_name = function(args)`: >
+        	^\s*\ze\i\+\s*=\s*function(
+        <	If the function is defined with `func_name : function() {...`: >
+                ^\s*\ze\i\+\s*[:]\s*(*function\s*(
+        <	When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
+        To avoid that use `:let` with a single quote string: >
+        	let &l:define = '^\s*\ze\k\+\s*=\s*function('
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'define',
+      redraw = { 'curswant' },
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('pattern to be used to find a macro definition'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_def',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'deco',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
+        "x" delete each combining character on its own.  When it is off (the
+        default) the character along with its combining characters are
+        deleted.
+        Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work differently from "2x"!
+
+        This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
+        may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
+        to remove only the combining ones.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'delcombine',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('delete combining characters on their own'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_deco',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'dict',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
+        for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|.  Each file should
+        contain a list of words.  This can be one word per line, or several
+        words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
+        preferred).  Maximum line length is 510 bytes.
+
+        When this option is empty or an entry "spell" is present, and spell
+        checking is enabled, words in the word lists for the currently active
+        'spelllang' are used. See |spell|.
+
+        To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
+        after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
+        name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
+        This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type.
+        Where to find a list of words?
+        - BSD/macOS include the "/usr/share/dict/words" file.
+        - Try "apt install spell" to get the "/usr/share/dict/words" file on
+          apt-managed systems (Debian/Ubuntu).
+        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+        uses another default.
+        Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'dictionary',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      normal_dname_chars = true,
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('list of file names used for keyword completion'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_dict',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_diff',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
+        between files.  See |diff-mode|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'diff',
+      noglob = true,
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('diff mode for the current window'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'dex',
+      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Expression which is evaluated to obtain a diff file (either ed-style
+        or unified-style) from two versions of a file.  See |diff-diffexpr|.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'diffexpr',
+      redraw = { 'curswant' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('expression used to obtain a diff file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_dex',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'dip',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_diffopt',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'internal,filler,closeoff' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Option settings for diff mode.  It can consist of the following items.
+        All are optional.  Items must be separated by a comma.
+
+        	filler		Show filler lines, to keep the text
+        			synchronized with a window that has inserted
+        			lines at the same position.  Mostly useful
+        			when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
+        			is set.
+
+        	context:{n}	Use a context of {n} lines between a change
+        			and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
+        			When omitted a context of six lines is used.
+        			When using zero the context is actually one,
+        			since folds require a line in between, also
+        			for a deleted line. Set it to a very large
+        			value (999999) to disable folding completely.
+        			See |fold-diff|.
+
+        	iblank		Ignore changes where lines are all blank.  Adds
+        			the "-B" flag to the "diff" command if
+        			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
+        			of the "diff" command for what this does
+        			exactly.
+        			NOTE: the diff windows will get out of sync,
+        			because no differences between blank lines are
+        			taken into account.
+
+        	icase		Ignore changes in case of text.  "a" and "A"
+        			are considered the same.  Adds the "-i" flag
+        			to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.
+
+        	iwhite		Ignore changes in amount of white space.  Adds
+        			the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
+        			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
+        			of the "diff" command for what this does
+        			exactly.  It should ignore adding trailing
+        			white space, but not leading white space.
+
+        	iwhiteall	Ignore all white space changes.  Adds
+        			the "-w" flag to the "diff" command if
+        			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
+        			of the "diff" command for what this does
+        			exactly.
+
+        	iwhiteeol	Ignore white space changes at end of line.
+        			Adds the "-Z" flag to the "diff" command if
+        			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
+        			of the "diff" command for what this does
+        			exactly.
+
+        	horizontal	Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless
+        			explicitly specified otherwise).
+
+        	vertical	Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless
+        			explicitly specified otherwise).
+
+        	closeoff	When a window is closed where 'diff' is set
+        			and there is only one window remaining in the
+        			same tab page with 'diff' set, execute
+        			`:diffoff` in that window.  This undoes a
+        			`:diffsplit` command.
+
+        	hiddenoff	Do not use diff mode for a buffer when it
+        			becomes hidden.
+
+        	foldcolumn:{n}	Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when
+        			starting diff mode.  Without this 2 is used.
+
+        	followwrap	Follow the 'wrap' option and leave as it is.
+
+        	internal	Use the internal diff library.  This is
+        			ignored when 'diffexpr' is set.  *E960*
+        			When running out of memory when writing a
+        			buffer this item will be ignored for diffs
+        			involving that buffer.  Set the 'verbose'
+        			option to see when this happens.
+
+        	indent-heuristic
+        			Use the indent heuristic for the internal
+        			diff library.
+
+        	linematch:{n}   Enable a second stage diff on each generated
+        			hunk in order to align lines. When the total
+        			number of lines in a hunk exceeds {n}, the
+        			second stage diff will not be performed as
+        			very large hunks can cause noticeable lag. A
+        			recommended setting is "linematch:60", as this
+        			will enable alignment for a 2 buffer diff with
+        			hunks of up to 30 lines each, or a 3 buffer
+        			diff with hunks of up to 20 lines each.
+
+        	algorithm:{text} Use the specified diff algorithm with the
+        			internal diff engine. Currently supported
+        			algorithms are:
+        			myers      the default algorithm
+        			minimal    spend extra time to generate the
+        				   smallest possible diff
+        			patience   patience diff algorithm
+        			histogram  histogram diff algorithm
+
+        Examples: >
+        	:set diffopt=internal,filler,context:4
+        	:set diffopt=
+        	:set diffopt=internal,filler,foldcolumn:3
+        	:set diffopt-=internal  " do NOT use the internal diff parser
+        <
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_diffopt',
+      full_name = 'diffopt',
+      list = 'onecommacolon',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('options for using diff mode'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_dip',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'dg',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
+        {char2}.  See |digraphs|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'digraph',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_dg',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'dir',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.
+
+        Possible items:
+        - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
+          possible.  If it is not possible in any directory, but last
+          directory listed in the option does not exist, it is created.
+        - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
+          impossible!) and no |E303| error will be given.
+        - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
+          the edited file.  On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
+          it doesn't show in a directory listing.  On MS-Windows the "hidden"
+          attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
+        - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-Windows) means to put
+          the swap file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading "."
+          is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
+        - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//",
+          the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
+          with all path separators replaced by percent '%' signs (including
+          the colon following the drive letter on Win32). This will ensure
+          file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
+          On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\".  However, When a
+          separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will
+          include the comma in the file name. Therefore it is recommended to
+          use '//', instead of '\\'.
+        - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
+          of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
+          name, precede it with a backslash.
+        - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
+        - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
+        - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+        - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
+          get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
+            :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
+        <
+        Editing the same file twice will result in a warning.  Using "/tmp" on
+        is discouraged: if the system crashes you lose the swap file. And
+        others on the computer may be able to see the files.
+        Use |:set+=| and |:set-=| when adding or removing directories from the
+        list, this avoids problems if the Nvim default is changed.
+
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = 'nodefault',
+      full_name = 'directory',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('list of directory names for the swap file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_dir',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'dy',
+      cb = 'did_set_display',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'lastline' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Change the way text is displayed.  This is a comma-separated list of
+        flags:
+        lastline	When included, as much as possible of the last line
+        		in a window will be displayed.  "@@@" is put in the
+        		last columns of the last screen line to indicate the
+        		rest of the line is not displayed.
+        truncate	Like "lastline", but "@@@" is displayed in the first
+        		column of the last screen line.  Overrules "lastline".
+        uhex		Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
+        		instead of using ^C and ~C.
+        msgsep		Obsolete flag. Allowed but takes no effect. |msgsep|
+
+        When neither "lastline" nor "truncate" is included, a last line that
+        doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
+
+        The "@" character can be changed by setting the "lastline" item in
+        'fillchars'.  The character is highlighted with |hl-NonText|.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_display',
+      full_name = 'display',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('list of flags for how to display text'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_dy',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ead',
+      cb = 'did_set_eadirection',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'both' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
+        	ver	vertically, width of windows is not affected
+        	hor	horizontally, height of windows is not affected
+        	both	width and height of windows is affected
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_eadirection',
+      full_name = 'eadirection',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("in which direction 'equalalways' works"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ead',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ed',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      full_name = 'edcompatible',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      immutable = true,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'emo',
+      cb = 'did_set_ambiwidth',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on all Unicode emoji characters are considered to be full width.
+        This excludes "text emoji" characters, which are normally displayed as
+        single width.  Unfortunately there is no good specification for this
+        and it has been determined on trial-and-error basis.  Use the
+        |setcellwidths()| function to change the behavior.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'emoji',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_emoji',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'enc',
+      cb = 'did_set_encoding',
+      defaults = { if_true = macros('ENC_DFLT') },
+      deny_in_modelines = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        String-encoding used internally and for |RPC| communication.
+        Always UTF-8.
+
+        See 'fileencoding' to control file-content encoding.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'encoding',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('encoding used internally'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_enc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'eof',
+      cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Indicates that a CTRL-Z character was found at the end of the file
+        when reading it.  Normally only happens when 'fileformat' is "dos".
+        When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
+        is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no CTRL-Z will be written at the
+        end of the file.
+        See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'endoffile',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('write CTRL-Z for last line in file'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_eof',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'eol',
+      cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
+        is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no <EOL> will be written for the
+        last line in the file.  This option is automatically set or reset when
+        starting to edit a new file, depending on whether file has an <EOL>
+        for the last line in the file.  Normally you don't have to set or
+        reset this option.
+        When 'binary' is off and 'fixeol' is on the value is not used when
+        writing the file.  When 'binary' is on or 'fixeol' is off it is used
+        to remember the presence of a <EOL> for the last line in the file, so
+        that when you write the file the situation from the original file can
+        be kept.  But you can change it if you want to.
+        See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'endofline',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('write <EOL> for last line in file'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_eol',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ea',
+      cb = 'did_set_equalalways',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
+        splitting or closing a window.  This also happens the moment the
+        option is switched on.  When off, splitting a window will reduce the
+        size of the current window and leave the other windows the same.  When
+        closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it
+        (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
+        When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
+        is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room.  The
+        'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
+        Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting
+        'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively.
+        If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are
+        currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in
+        the future).
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'equalalways',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('windows are automatically made the same size'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ea',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ep',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        External program to use for "=" command.  When this option is empty
+        the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent'
+        or 'indentexpr'.
+        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
+        about including spaces and backslashes.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'equalprg',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('external program to use for "=" command'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ep',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'eb',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages.  This only
+        makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
+        for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
+        mode).  See 'visualbell' to make the bell behave like a screen flash
+        or do nothing. See 'belloff' to finetune when to ring the bell.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'errorbells',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('ring the bell for error messages'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_eb',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ef',
+      defaults = { if_true = macros('DFLT_ERRORFILE') },
+      desc = [=[
+        Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
+        When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
+        following argument.  See |-q|.
+        NOT used for the ":make" command.  See 'makeef' for that.
+        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'errorfile',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ef',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'efm',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = macros('DFLT_EFM'),
+        doc = 'is very long',
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
+        (see |errorformat|).
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'errorformat',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('description of the lines in the error file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_efm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ei',
+      cb = 'did_set_eventignore',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
+        When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand
+        events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed.
+        Otherwise this is a comma-separated list of event names.  Example: >
+            :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
+        <
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_eventignore',
+      full_name = 'eventignore',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('autocommand events that are ignored'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ei',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'et',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
+        <Tab>.  Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
+        when 'autoindent' is on.  To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
+        on, use CTRL-V<Tab>.  See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'expandtab',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('use spaces when <Tab> is inserted'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_et',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ex',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Automatically execute .nvim.lua, .nvimrc, and .exrc files in the
+        current directory, if the file is in the |trust| list. Use |:trust| to
+        manage trusted files. See also |vim.secure.read()|.
+
+        Compare 'exrc' to |editorconfig|:
+        - 'exrc' can execute any code; editorconfig only specifies settings.
+        - 'exrc' is Nvim-specific; editorconfig works in other editors.
+
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'exrc',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('read .nvimrc and .exrc in the current directory'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_exrc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fenc',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_encoding',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        File-content encoding for the current buffer. Conversion is done with
+        iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.
+
+        When 'fileencoding' is not UTF-8, conversion will be done when
+        writing the file.  For reading see below.
+        When 'fileencoding' is empty, the file will be saved with UTF-8
+        encoding (no conversion when reading or writing a file).
+
+        WARNING: Conversion to a non-Unicode encoding can cause loss of
+        information!
+
+        See |encoding-names| for the possible values.  Additionally, values may be
+        specified that can be handled by the converter, see
+        |mbyte-conversion|.
+
+        When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
+        To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
+        'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.  One exception: when
+        'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used.
+        For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used.
+
+        Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
+        When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase.  Thus
+        you can set it with uppercase values too.  '_' characters are
+        replaced with '-'.  If a name is recognized from the list at
+        |encoding-names|, it is replaced by the standard name.  For example
+        "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".
+
+        When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
+        option is set, because the file would be different when written.
+
+        Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens
+        AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be
+        written.  If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set
+        'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q".
+
+        This option cannot be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_encoding',
+      full_name = 'fileencoding',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines', 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('file encoding for multi-byte text'),
+      tags = { 'E213' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_fenc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fencs',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
+        an existing file.  When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
+        mentioned character encoding.  If an error is detected, the next one
+        in the list is tried.  When an encoding is found that works,
+        'fileencoding' is set to it.  If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
+        an empty string, which means that UTF-8 is used.
+        	WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! You can use
+        	the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters
+        	that can't be converted.
+        For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
+        will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
+        "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present).  If you prefer
+        another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
+        preferred encoding is to be used.  Example: >
+        	au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
+        		\ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
+        <	This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
+        non-blank characters.
+        When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is
+        not used.
+        Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value
+        of 'fileencoding' is used instead.  You can set it with: >
+        	:setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2
+        <	This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than
+        an empty file.
+        The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
+        (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file.  It must not be preceded
+        by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
+        An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
+        because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
+        accepted.
+        The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the
+        environment.  It is useful when your environment uses a non-latin1
+        encoding, such as Russian.
+        When a file contains an illegal UTF-8 byte sequence it won't be
+        recognized as "utf-8".  You can use the |8g8| command to find the
+        illegal byte sequence.
+        WRONG VALUES:			WHAT'S WRONG:
+        	latin1,utf-8		"latin1" will always be used
+        	utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1	BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
+        				file
+        	cp1250,latin1		"cp1250" will always be used
+        If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
+        See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
+        Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
+        is read.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_encoding',
+      full_name = 'fileencodings',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('automatically detected character encodings'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_fencs',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ff',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_fileformat',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = macros('DFLT_FF'),
+        doc = 'Windows: "dos", Unix: "unix"',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
+        reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
+            dos	    <CR><NL>
+            unix    <NL>
+            mac	    <CR>
+        When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
+        See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
+        For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
+        When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
+        works like it was set to "unix".
+        This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
+        'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
+        When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
+        option is set, because the file would be different when written.
+        This option cannot be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_fileformat',
+      full_name = 'fileformat',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      redraw = { 'curswant', 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('file format used for file I/O'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ff',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ffs',
+      cb = 'did_set_fileformats',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = macros('DFLT_FFS_VIM'),
+        doc = 'Windows: "dos,unix", Unix: "unix,dos"',
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
+        starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
+        buffer:
+        - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
+          always.  It is not set automatically.
+        - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
+          is opened.  'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer.  The
+          'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
+          buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
+        - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
+          <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file.  When starting to
+          edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
+          1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
+             'fileformat' is set to "dos".
+          2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'
+             is set to "unix".  Note that when a <NL> is found without a
+             preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
+          3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if a <CR> is found, and
+             if 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
+             This means that "mac" is only chosen when:
+              "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and
+              "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file.
+             Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before
+             the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in
+             the first few lines, "mac" is used.
+          4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
+             'fileformats' is used.
+          When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
+          this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
+          file only, the option is not changed.
+        When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.
+
+        When Vim starts up with an empty buffer the first item is used.  You
+        can overrule this by setting 'fileformat' in your .vimrc.
+
+        For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
+        are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
+        done:
+        - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection.  Dos
+          format will be used.
+        - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
+          is done.  This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
+          <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
+          used.
+        Also see |file-formats|.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_fileformat',
+      full_name = 'fileformats',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("automatically detected values for 'fileformat'"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ffs',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fic',
+      defaults = {
+        condition = 'CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME',
+        if_false = false,
+        if_true = true,
+        doc = [[on for systems where case in file
+   names is normally ignored]],
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        When set case is ignored when using file names and directories.
+        See 'wildignorecase' for only ignoring case when doing completion.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'fileignorecase',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('ignore case when using file names'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_fic',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ft',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_filetype_or_syntax',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
+        All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
+        executed.  Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
+        name.
+        Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
+        This option is normally set when the file type is detected.  To enable
+        this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
+        Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
+        for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
+        Example, for in an IDL file: >
+        	/* vim: set filetype=idl : */
+        <	|FileType| |filetypes|
+        When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
+        names.  Example: >
+        	/* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */
+        <	This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype.
+        This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files.  More than
+        one dot may appear.
+        This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
+        'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
+        Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'filetype',
+      noglob = true,
+      normal_fname_chars = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('type of file, used for autocommands'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ft',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fcs',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_chars_option',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Characters to fill the statuslines, vertical separators and special
+        lines in the window.
+        It is a comma-separated list of items.  Each item has a name, a colon
+        and the value of that item:
+
+          item		default		Used for ~
+          stl		' '		statusline of the current window
+          stlnc		' '		statusline of the non-current windows
+          wbr		' '		window bar
+          horiz		'─' or '-'	horizontal separators |:split|
+          horizup	'┴' or '-'	upwards facing horizontal separator
+          horizdown	'┬' or '-'	downwards facing horizontal separator
+          vert		'│' or '|'	vertical separators |:vsplit|
+          vertleft	'┤' or '|'	left facing vertical separator
+          vertright	'├' or '|'	right facing vertical separator
+          verthoriz	'┼' or '+'	overlapping vertical and horizontal
+        				separator
+          fold		'·' or '-'	filling 'foldtext'
+          foldopen	'-'		mark the beginning of a fold
+          foldclose	'+'		show a closed fold
+          foldsep	'│' or '|'      open fold middle marker
+          diff		'-'		deleted lines of the 'diff' option
+          msgsep	' '		message separator 'display'
+          eob		'~'		empty lines at the end of a buffer
+          lastline	'@'		'display' contains lastline/truncate
+
+        Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default.
+
+        Note that "horiz", "horizup", "horizdown", "vertleft", "vertright" and
+        "verthoriz" are only used when 'laststatus' is 3, since only vertical
+        window separators are used otherwise.
+
+        If 'ambiwidth' is "double" then "horiz", "horizup", "horizdown",
+        "vert", "vertleft", "vertright", "verthoriz", "foldsep" and "fold"
+        default to single-byte alternatives.
+
+        Example: >
+            :set fillchars=stl:\ ,stlnc:\ ,vert:│,fold:·,diff:-
+        <
+        For the "stl", "stlnc", "foldopen", "foldclose" and "foldsep" items
+        single-byte and multibyte characters are supported.  But double-width
+        characters are not supported.
+
+        The highlighting used for these items:
+          item		highlight group ~
+          stl		StatusLine		|hl-StatusLine|
+          stlnc		StatusLineNC		|hl-StatusLineNC|
+          wbr		WinBar			|hl-WinBar| or |hl-WinBarNC|
+          horiz		WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
+          horizup	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
+          horizdown	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
+          vert		WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
+          vertleft	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
+          vertright	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
+          verthoriz	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
+          fold		Folded			|hl-Folded|
+          diff		DiffDelete		|hl-DiffDelete|
+          eob		EndOfBuffer		|hl-EndOfBuffer|
+          lastline	NonText			|hl-NonText|
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_chars_option',
+      full_name = 'fillchars',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'global', 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('characters to use for displaying special items'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_fcs',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fixeol',
+      cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When writing a file and this option is on, <EOL> at the end of file
+        will be restored if missing.  Turn this option off if you want to
+        preserve the situation from the original file.
+        When the 'binary' option is set the value of this option doesn't
+        matter.
+        See the 'endofline' option.
+        See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'fixendofline',
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('make sure last line in file has <EOL>'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_fixeol',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fcl',
+      cb = 'did_set_foldclose',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
+        its level is higher than 'foldlevel'.  Useful if you want folds to
+        automatically close when moving out of them.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_foldclose',
+      full_name = 'foldclose',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('close a fold when the cursor leaves it'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_fcl',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fdc',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_foldcolumn',
+      defaults = { if_true = '0' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When and how to draw the foldcolumn. Valid values are:
+            "auto":       resize to the minimum amount of folds to display.
+            "auto:[1-9]": resize to accommodate multiple folds up to the
+        		  selected level
+            "0":          to disable foldcolumn
+            "[1-9]":      to display a fixed number of columns
+        See |folding|.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_foldcolumn',
+      full_name = 'foldcolumn',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('width of the column used to indicate folds'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fen',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When off, all folds are open.  This option can be used to quickly
+        switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
+        folds (including manually opened or closed folds).  It can be toggled
+        with the |zi| command.  The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
+        'foldenable' is off.
+        This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
+        See |folding|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'foldenable',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('set to display all folds open'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fde',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_foldexpr',
+      defaults = { if_true = '0' },
+      desc = [=[
+        The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
+        for each line to obtain its fold level.  The context is set to the
+        script where 'foldexpr' was set, script-local items can be accessed.
+        See |fold-expr| for the usage.
+
+        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
+        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
+        This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
+        on or the 'modelineexpr' option is off.
+
+        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
+        evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'foldexpr',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('expression used when \'foldmethod\' is "expr"'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fdi',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_foldignore',
+      defaults = { if_true = '#' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent".  Lines starting with
+        characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
+        lines.  White space is skipped before checking for this character.
+        The default "#" works well for C programs.  See |fold-indent|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'foldignore',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('ignore lines when \'foldmethod\' is "indent"'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fdl',
+      cb = 'did_set_foldlevel',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
+        Setting this option to zero will close all folds.  Higher numbers will
+        close fewer folds.
+        This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
+        See |fold-foldlevel|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'foldlevel',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('close folds with a level higher than this'),
+      type = 'number',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fdls',
+      defaults = { if_true = -1 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
+        Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
+        some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
+        This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
+        overrules this option.  Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
+        ignores this option and closes all folds.
+        It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
+        overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
+        When the value is negative, it is not used.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'foldlevelstart',
+      redraw = { 'curswant' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("'foldlevel' when starting to edit a file"),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_fdls',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fmr',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_foldmarker',
+      defaults = { if_true = '{{{,}}}' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker".  There
+        must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker.  The
+        marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
+        See |fold-marker|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'foldmarker',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('markers used when \'foldmethod\' is "marker"'),
+      tags = { 'E536' },
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fdm',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_foldmethod',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'manual' },
+      desc = [=[
+        The kind of folding used for the current window.  Possible values:
+        |fold-manual|	manual	    Folds are created manually.
+        |fold-indent|	indent	    Lines with equal indent form a fold.
+        |fold-expr|	expr	    'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
+        |fold-marker|	marker	    Markers are used to specify folds.
+        |fold-syntax|	syntax	    Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
+        |fold-diff|	diff	    Fold text that is not changed.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_foldmethod',
+      full_name = 'foldmethod',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('folding type'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fml',
+      cb = 'did_set_foldminlines',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed
+        closed.  Also for manually closed folds.  With the default value of
+        one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines.
+        Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line.
+        Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed.  After using
+        "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
+        than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'foldminlines',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines for a fold to be closed'),
+      type = 'number',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fdn',
+      cb = 'did_set_foldnestmax',
+      defaults = { if_true = 20 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
+        methods.  This avoids that too many folds will be created.  Using more
+        than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'foldnestmax',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum fold depth'),
+      type = 'number',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fdo',
+      cb = 'did_set_foldopen',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,search,tag,undo' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
+        command moves the cursor into a closed fold.  It is a comma-separated
+        list of items.
+        NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used.
+        Add the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
+        (rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself)
+
+        	item		commands ~
+        	all		any
+        	block		(, {, [[, [{, etc.
+        	hor		horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
+        	insert		any command in Insert mode
+        	jump		far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
+        	mark		jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
+        	percent		"%"
+        	quickfix	":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
+        	search		search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
+        			(not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
+        			Also for |[s| and |]s|.
+        	tag		jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
+        	undo		undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
+        When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
+        this option is not used.  This means the operator will include the
+        whole closed fold.
+        Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
+        very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
+        In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
+        when text is inserted.
+        To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
+        set the 'foldclose' option to "all".
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_foldopen',
+      full_name = 'foldopen',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'curswant' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('for which commands a fold will be opened'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_fdo',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fdt',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'foldtext()' },
+      desc = [=[
+        An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
+        fold.  The context is set to the script where 'foldexpr' was set,
+        script-local items can be accessed.  See |fold-foldtext| for the
+        usage.
+
+        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
+        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+
+        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
+        evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'foldtext',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('expression used to display for a closed fold'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fex',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq|
+        operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions').  When this
+        option is empty 'formatprg' is used.
+
+        The |v:lnum|  variable holds the first line to be formatted.
+        The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted.
+        The |v:char|  variable holds the character that is going to be
+        	      inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to
+        	      automatic formatting.  This can be empty.  Don't insert
+        	      it yet!
+
+        Example: >
+        	:set formatexpr=mylang#Format()
+        <	This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the
+        autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload|
+
+        The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding
+        text beyond that limit.  This happens under the same conditions as
+        when internal formatting is used.  Make sure the cursor is kept in the
+        same spot relative to the text then!  The |mode()| function will
+        return "i" or "R" in this situation.
+
+        When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
+        the internal format mechanism.
+
+        If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
+        the script ID (|local-function|). Example: >
+        	set formatexpr=s:MyFormatExpr()
+        	set formatexpr=<SID>SomeFormatExpr()
+        <	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
+        where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.
+
+        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
+        since changing the buffer text is not allowed.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+        NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'formatexpr',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('expression used with "gq" command'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_fex',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fo',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_formatoptions',
+      defaults = { if_true = macros('DFLT_FO_VIM') },
+      desc = [=[
+        This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
+        formatting is to be done.
+        See |fo-table| for possible values and |gq| for how to format text.
+        Commas can be inserted for readability.
+        To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
+        "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_formatoptions',
+      full_name = 'formatoptions',
+      list = 'flags',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('how automatic formatting is to be done'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_fo',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'flp',
+      alloced = true,
+      defaults = { if_true = '^\\s*\\d\\+[\\]:.)}\\t ]\\s*' },
+      desc = [=[
+        A pattern that is used to recognize a list header.  This is used for
+        the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'.
+        The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for
+        the line below it.  You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match
+        while still checking more characters.  There must be a character
+        following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled
+        like there is no match.
+        The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation
+        character and white space.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'formatlistpat',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('pattern used to recognize a list header'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_flp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fp',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
+        selected with the |gq| operator.  The program must take the input on
+        stdin and produce the output on stdout.  The Unix program "fmt" is
+        such a program.
+        If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead.
+        Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal
+        format function will be used |C-indenting|.
+        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
+        about including spaces and backslashes.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'formatprg',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('name of external program used with "gq" command'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_fp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'fs',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, the OS function fsync() will be called after saving a file
+        (|:write|, |writefile()|, …), |swap-file|, |undo-persistence| and |shada-file|.
+        This flushes the file to disk, ensuring that it is safely written.
+        Slow on some systems: writing buffers, quitting Nvim, and other
+        operations may sometimes take a few seconds.
+
+        Files are ALWAYS flushed ('fsync' is ignored) when:
+        - |CursorHold| event is triggered
+        - |:preserve| is called
+        - system signals low battery life
+        - Nvim exits abnormally
+
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'fsync',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('whether to invoke fsync() after file write'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_fs',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'gd',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on.  This means that
+        all matches in a line are substituted instead of one.  When a 'g' flag
+        is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution
+        of all or one match.  See |complex-change|.
+
+        	command		'gdefault' on	'gdefault' off	~
+        	:s///		  subst. all	  subst. one
+        	:s///g		  subst. one	  subst. all
+        	:s///gg		  subst. all	  subst. one
+
+        DEPRECATED: Setting this option may break plugins that are not aware
+        of this option.  Also, many users get confused that adding the /g flag
+        has the opposite effect of that it normally does.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'gdefault',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('the ":substitute" flag \'g\' is default on'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_gd',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'gfm',
+      defaults = { if_true = macros('DFLT_GREPFORMAT') },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
+        This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
+        'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'grepformat',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("format of 'grepprg' output"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_gefm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'gp',
+      defaults = {
+        condition = 'MSWIN',
+        if_false = 'grep -n $* /dev/null',
+        if_true = 'findstr /n $* nul',
+        doc = [["grep -n ",
+           Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null"]],
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Program to use for the |:grep| command.  This option may contain '%'
+        and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
+        line.  The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
+        will be included.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See
+        |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+        When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"
+        also work well with a single file: >
+        	:set grepprg=grep\ -nH
+        <	Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command
+        works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like
+        |:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|.
+        See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
+        apply equally to 'grepprg'.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'grepprg',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('program to use for ":grep"'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_gp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'gcr',
+      cb = 'did_set_guicursor',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'n-v-c-sm:block,i-ci-ve:ver25,r-cr-o:hor20' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Configures the cursor style for each mode. Works in the GUI and many
+        terminals.  See |tui-cursor-shape|.
+
+        To disable cursor-styling, reset the option: >
+        	:set guicursor=
+
+        <	To enable mode shapes, "Cursor" highlight, and blinking: >
+        	:set guicursor=n-v-c:block,i-ci-ve:ver25,r-cr:hor20,o:hor50
+        	  \,a:blinkwait700-blinkoff400-blinkon250-Cursor/lCursor
+        	  \,sm:block-blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175
+
+        <	The option is a comma-separated list of parts.  Each part consists of a
+        mode-list and an argument-list:
+        	mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
+        The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
+        	n	Normal mode
+        	v	Visual mode
+        	ve	Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
+        		if not specified)
+        	o	Operator-pending mode
+        	i	Insert mode
+        	r	Replace mode
+        	c	Command-line Normal (append) mode
+        	ci	Command-line Insert mode
+        	cr	Command-line Replace mode
+        	sm	showmatch in Insert mode
+        	a	all modes
+        The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
+        	hor{N}	horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
+        	ver{N}	vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
+        	block	block cursor, fills the whole character
+        		- Only one of the above three should be present.
+        		- Default is "block" for each mode.
+        	blinkwait{N}				*cursor-blinking*
+        	blinkon{N}
+        	blinkoff{N}
+        		blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
+        		the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
+        		the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
+        		cursor is not shown.  Times are in msec.  When one of
+        		the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. E.g.: >
+        			:set guicursor=n:blinkon0
+        <			- Default is "blinkon0" for each mode.
+        	{group-name}
+        		Highlight group that decides the color and font of the
+        		cursor.
+        		In the |TUI|:
+        		- |inverse|/reverse and no group-name are interpreted
+        		  as "host-terminal default cursor colors" which
+        		  typically means "inverted bg and fg colors".
+        		- |ctermfg| and |guifg| are ignored.
+        	{group-name}/{group-name}
+        		Two highlight group names, the first is used when
+        		no language mappings are used, the other when they
+        		are. |language-mapping|
+
+        Examples of parts:
+           n-c-v:block-nCursor	In Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
+        			block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
+        			highlight group
+           n-v-c-sm:block,i-ci-ve:ver25-Cursor,r-cr-o:hor20
+        			In Normal et al. modes, use a block cursor
+        			with the default colors defined by the host
+        			terminal.  In Insert-like modes, use
+        			a vertical bar cursor with colors from
+        			"Cursor" highlight group.  In Replace-like
+        			modes, use an underline cursor with
+        			default colors.
+           i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
+        			In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
+        			30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
+        			"iCursor" highlight group.  Blink a bit
+        			faster.
+
+        The 'a' mode is different.  It will set the given argument-list for
+        all modes.  It does not reset anything to defaults.  This can be used
+        to do a common setting for all modes.  For example, to switch off
+        blinking: "a:blinkon0"
+
+        Examples of cursor highlighting: >
+            :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
+            :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'guicursor',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('GUI: settings for cursor shape and blinking'),
+      tags = { 'E545', 'E546', 'E548', 'E549' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_guicursor',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'gfn',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
+        In its simplest form the value is just one font name.  When
+        the font cannot be found you will get an error message.  To try other
+        font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
+        The first valid font is used.
+
+        Spaces after a comma are ignored.  To include a comma in a font name
+        precede it with a backslash.  Setting an option requires an extra
+        backslash before a space and a backslash.  See also
+        |option-backslash|.  For example: >
+            :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
+        <	will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
+        will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.
+
+        If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.
+        If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource
+        settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
+        will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
+        the case of X).  The font names given should be "normal" fonts.  Vim
+        will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.
+
+        For Win32 and Mac OS: >
+            :set guifont=*
+        <	will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.
+
+        The font name depends on the GUI used.
+
+        For Mac OSX you can use something like this: >
+            :set guifont=Monaco:h10
+        <								*E236*
+        Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
+        width).
+
+        To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
+        program.  The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.
+
+        For the Win32 GUI					*E244* *E245*
+        - takes these options in the font name:
+        	hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
+        	wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
+        	b   - bold
+        	i   - italic
+        	u   - underline
+        	s   - strikeout
+        	cXX - character set XX.  Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
+        	      BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
+        	      HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
+        	      SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
+        	      Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".
+
+          Use a ':' to separate the options.
+        - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
+          backslashes to escape the spaces.
+        - Examples: >
+            :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
+            :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
+        <
+      ]=],
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      full_name = 'guifont',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('GUI: Name(s) of font(s) to be used'),
+      tags = { 'E235', 'E596' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_guifont',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'gfw',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Comma-separated list of fonts to be used for double-width characters.
+        The first font that can be loaded is used.
+        Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
+        specified with 'guifont' and the same height.
+
+        When 'guifont' has a valid font and 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will
+        attempt to set 'guifontwide' to a matching double-width font.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'guifontwide',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('list of font names for double-wide characters'),
+      tags = { 'E231', 'E533', 'E534' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_guifontwide',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'go',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = '',
+        doc = '"egmrLT"   (MS-Windows)',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim.  It is a
+        sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
+        GUI should be used.
+        To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
+        "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
+
+        Valid letters are as follows:
+        						*guioptions_a* *'go-a'*
+          'a'	Autoselect:  If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
+        	or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
+        	the windowing system's global selection.  This means that the
+        	Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
+        	applications as well as into Vim itself.  When the Visual mode
+        	ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
+        	application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
+        	is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
+        	Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
+        	applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
+        	    If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
+        	windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
+        	by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
+        	The same applies to the modeless selection.
+        							*'go-P'*
+          'P'	Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "*
+        	register.
+        							*'go-A'*
+          'A'	Autoselect for the modeless selection.  Like 'a', but only
+        	applies to the modeless selection.
+
+        	    'guioptions'   autoselect Visual  autoselect modeless ~
+        		 ""		 -			 -
+        		 "a"		yes			yes
+        		 "A"		 -			yes
+        		 "aA"		yes			yes
+
+        							*'go-c'*
+          'c'	Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
+        	choices.
+        							*'go-d'*
+          'd'	Use dark theme variant if available.
+        							*'go-e'*
+          'e'	Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'.
+        	'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels.
+        	When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used.
+        	The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently
+        	Mac OS/X and MS-Windows.
+        							*'go-i'*
+          'i'	Use a Vim icon.
+        							*'go-m'*
+          'm'	Menu bar is present.
+        							*'go-M'*
+          'M'	The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced.  Note
+        	that this flag must be added in the vimrc file, before
+        	switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc|
+        	file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
+        	`:syntax on` and `:filetype on` commands load the menu too).
+        							*'go-g'*
+          'g'	Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey.  If
+        	'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
+        							*'go-T'*
+          'T'	Include Toolbar.  Currently only in Win32 GUI.
+        							*'go-r'*
+          'r'	Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
+        							*'go-R'*
+          'R'	Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
+        	split window.
+        							*'go-l'*
+          'l'	Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
+        							*'go-L'*
+          'L'	Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
+        	split window.
+        							*'go-b'*
+          'b'	Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present.  Its size depends on
+        	the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
+        	flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
+        							*'go-h'*
+          'h'	Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
+        	line.  Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|
+
+        And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
+        you really want to :-).  See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.
+
+        							*'go-v'*
+          'v'	Use a vertical button layout for dialogs.  When not included,
+        	a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
+        	vertical layout is used anyway.  Not supported in GTK 3.
+        							*'go-p'*
+          'p'	Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI.  This is required for some
+        	window managers.  If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
+        	the right moment, try adding this flag.  This must be done
+        	before starting the GUI.  Set it in your |gvimrc|.  Adding or
+        	removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
+        							*'go-k'*
+          'k'	Keep the GUI window size when adding/removing a scrollbar, or
+        	toolbar, tabline, etc.  Instead, the behavior is similar to
+        	when the window is maximized and will adjust 'lines' and
+        	'columns' to fit to the window.  Without the 'k' flag Vim will
+        	try to keep 'lines' and 'columns' the same when adding and
+        	removing GUI components.
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = false,
+      full_name = 'guioptions',
+      list = 'flags',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('GUI: Which components and options are used'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'gtl',
+      desc = [=[
+        When non-empty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab
+        pages line.  When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a
+        default label.  See |setting-guitablabel| for more info.
+
+        The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
+        'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below.
+        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+
+        Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed.  'e' must be
+        present in 'guioptions'.  For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is
+        used.
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = false,
+      full_name = 'guitablabel',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('GUI: custom label for a tab page'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'gtt',
+      desc = [=[
+        When non-empty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab
+        pages line.  When empty Vim will use a default tooltip.
+        This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above.
+        You can include a line break.  Simplest method is to use |:let|: >
+        	:let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two"
+        <
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = false,
+      full_name = 'guitabtooltip',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('GUI: custom tooltip for a tab page'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'hf',
+      cb = 'did_set_helpfile',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = macros('DFLT_HELPFILE'),
+        doc = [[(MS-Windows) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
+                  (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt"]],
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Name of the main help file.  All distributed help files should be
+        placed together in one directory.  Additionally, all "doc" directories
+        in 'runtimepath' will be used.
+        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  For example:
+        "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt".  If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
+        tried.  Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
+        spaces and backslashes.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'helpfile',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('full path name of the main help file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_hf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'hh',
+      cb = 'did_set_helpheight',
+      defaults = { if_true = 20 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
+        ":help" command.  The initial height of the help window is half of the
+        current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
+        windows.  When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
+        set to 'helpheight'.  Set to zero to disable.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'helpheight',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimum height of a new help window'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_hh',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'hlg',
+      cb = 'did_set_helplang',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = '',
+        doc = 'messages language or empty',
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Comma-separated list of languages.  Vim will use the first language
+        for which the desired help can be found.  The English help will always
+        be used as a last resort.  You can add "en" to prefer English over
+        another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
+        language and not in the English help.
+        Example: >
+        	:set helplang=de,it
+        <	This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
+        files.
+        When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
+        try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
+        See |help-translated|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'helplang',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('preferred help languages'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_hlg',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'hid',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When off a buffer is unloaded (including loss of undo information)
+        when it is |abandon|ed.  When on a buffer becomes hidden when it is
+        |abandon|ed.  A buffer displayed in another window does not become
+        hidden, of course.
+
+        Commands that move through the buffer list sometimes hide a buffer
+        although the 'hidden' option is off when these three are true:
+        - the buffer is modified
+        - 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible
+        - the '!' flag was used
+        Also see |windows|.
+
+        To hide a specific buffer use the 'bufhidden' option.
+        'hidden' is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'hidden',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("don't unload buffer when it is |abandon|ed"),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_hid',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'hl',
+      cb = 'did_set_highlight',
+      defaults = { if_true = macros('HIGHLIGHT_INIT') },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      full_name = 'highlight',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('sets highlighting mode for various occasions'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_hl',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'hi',
+      defaults = { if_true = 10000 },
+      desc = [=[
+        A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
+        is remembered.  This option decides how many entries may be stored in
+        each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|).
+        The maximum value is 10000.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'history',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of command-lines that are remembered'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_hi',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'hk',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      full_name = 'hkmap',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      immutable = true,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'hkp',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      full_name = 'hkmapp',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      immutable = true,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'hls',
+      cb = 'did_set_hlsearch',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
+        The |hl-Search| highlight group determines the highlighting for all
+        matches not under the cursor while the |hl-CurSearch| highlight group
+        (if defined) determines the highlighting for the match under the
+        cursor. If |hl-CurSearch| is not defined, then |hl-Search| is used for
+        both. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
+        are not applied.
+        See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
+        When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
+        off with |:nohlsearch|.  This does not change the option value, as
+        soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back.
+        'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches.
+        When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
+        highlight all of the matched text.  However, this depends on where the
+        search starts.  This will be the first line in the window or the first
+        line below a closed fold.  A match in a previous line which is not
+        drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line.
+        You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup
+        with the 'h' flag in 'shada' |shada-h|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'hlsearch',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('highlight matches with last search pattern'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_hls',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_title_icon',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = false,
+        doc = 'off, on when title can be restored',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
+        'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
+        currently being edited.  Only the last part of the name is used.
+        Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
+        Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'icon',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Vim set the text of the window icon'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_icon',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_iconstring',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
+        the window.  This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
+        Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
+        When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
+        expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.  See
+        'titlestring' for example settings.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'iconstring',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('to use for the Vim icon text'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_iconstring',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ic',
+      cb = 'did_set_ignorecase',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Ignore case in search patterns, |cmdline-completion|, when
+        searching in the tags file, and |expr-==|.
+        Also see 'smartcase' and 'tagcase'.
+        Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
+        |/ignorecase|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'ignorecase',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('ignore case in search patterns'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ic',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'imc',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
+        line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
+        Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
+        English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
+        characters with dead keys.
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = false,
+      full_name = 'imcmdline',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('use IM when starting to edit a command line'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'imd',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = false,
+        doc = 'off, on for some systems (SGI)',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        When set the Input Method is never used.  This is useful to disable
+        the IM when it doesn't work properly.
+        Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines.  This
+        may change in later releases.
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = false,
+      full_name = 'imdisable',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('do not use the IM in any mode'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'imi',
+      cb = 'did_set_iminsert',
+      defaults = { if_true = macros('B_IMODE_NONE') },
+      desc = [=[
+        Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
+        Insert mode.  Valid values:
+        	0	:lmap is off and IM is off
+        	1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
+        	2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
+        To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
+        this can be used: >
+        	:inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
+        <	This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
+        mode.
+        Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
+        |i_CTRL-^|.
+        The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
+        It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'iminsert',
+      pv_name = 'p_imi',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('use :lmap or IM in Insert mode'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_iminsert',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ims',
+      defaults = { if_true = macros('B_IMODE_USE_INSERT') },
+      desc = [=[
+        Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
+        entering a search pattern.  Valid values:
+        	-1	the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
+        		'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
+        	0	:lmap is off and IM is off
+        	1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
+        	2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
+        Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
+        |c_CTRL-^|.
+        The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
+        option to a valid keymap name.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'imsearch',
+      pv_name = 'p_ims',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('use :lmap or IM when typing a search pattern'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_imsearch',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'icm',
+      cb = 'did_set_inccommand',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'nosplit' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When nonempty, shows the effects of |:substitute|, |:smagic|,
+        |:snomagic| and user commands with the |:command-preview| flag as you
+        type.
+
+        Possible values:
+        	nosplit	Shows the effects of a command incrementally in the
+        		buffer.
+        	split	Like "nosplit", but also shows partial off-screen
+        		results in a preview window.
+
+        If the preview for built-in commands is too slow (exceeds
+        'redrawtime') then 'inccommand' is automatically disabled until
+        |Command-line-mode| is done.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_inccommand',
+      full_name = 'inccommand',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Live preview of substitution'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_icm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'inc',
+      alloced = true,
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Pattern to be used to find an include command.  It is a search
+        pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|).  This option
+        is used for the commands "[i", "]I", "[d", etc.
+        Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that
+        comes after the matched pattern.  But if "\zs" appears in the pattern
+        then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it
+        appears, is used as the file name.  Use this to include characters
+        that are not in 'isfname', such as a space.  You can then use
+        'includeexpr' to process the matched text.
+        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'include',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('pattern to be used to find an include file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_inc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'inex',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
+        option to a file name.  Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >
+        	:setlocal includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
+        <	The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
+        Note the double backslash: the `:set` command first halves them, then
+        one remains in the value, where "\." matches a dot literally.  For
+        simple character replacements `tr()` avoids the need for escaping: >
+        	:setlocal includeexpr=tr(v:fname,'.','/')
+        <
+        Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
+        found.  Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
+        Also used for |<cfile>|.
+
+        If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
+        the script ID (|local-function|). Example: >
+        	setlocal includeexpr=s:MyIncludeExpr(v:fname)
+        	setlocal includeexpr=<SID>SomeIncludeExpr(v:fname)
+        <	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
+        where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.
+
+        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+
+        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
+        evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'includeexpr',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('expression used to process an include line'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_inex',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'is',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed
+        so far, matches.  The matched string is highlighted.  If the pattern
+        is invalid or not found, nothing is shown.  The screen will be updated
+        often, this is only useful on fast terminals.
+        Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its
+        original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>.  You
+        still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the
+        cursor to the match.
+        You can use the CTRL-G and CTRL-T keys to move to the next and
+        previous match. |c_CTRL-G| |c_CTRL-T|
+        Vim only searches for about half a second.  With a complicated
+        pattern and/or a lot of text the match may not be found.  This is to
+        avoid that Vim hangs while you are typing the pattern.
+        The |hl-IncSearch| highlight group determines the highlighting.
+        When 'hlsearch' is on, all matched strings are highlighted too while
+        typing a search command. See also: 'hlsearch'.
+        If you don't want to turn 'hlsearch' on, but want to highlight all
+        matches while searching, you can turn on and off 'hlsearch' with
+        autocmd.  Example: >
+        	augroup vimrc-incsearch-highlight
+        	  autocmd!
+        	  autocmd CmdlineEnter /,\? :set hlsearch
+        	  autocmd CmdlineLeave /,\? :set nohlsearch
+        	augroup END
+        <
+        CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match
+        to the command line.  If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the
+        command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is
+        converted to lowercase.
+        CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current
+        match, excluding the characters that were already typed.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'incsearch',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('highlight match while typing search pattern'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_is',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'inde',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
+        It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
+        in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
+        When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
+        'smartindent' indenting.  When 'lisp' is set, this option is
+        is only used when 'lispoptions' contains "expr:1".
+        The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
+        which the indent is to be computed.  The cursor is also in this line
+        when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).
+
+        If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
+        the script ID (|local-function|). Example: >
+        	set indentexpr=s:MyIndentExpr()
+        	set indentexpr=<SID>SomeIndentExpr()
+        <	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
+        where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.
+
+        The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent.  It
+        can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
+        used for the indent).
+        Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
+        and |lispindent()|.
+        The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!  It must
+        not change the text, jump to another window, etc.  Afterwards the
+        cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
+        Normally this option would be set to call a function: >
+        	:set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
+        <	Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
+        "msg".
+        See |indent-expression|.
+
+        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+
+        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
+        evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'indentexpr',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('expression used to obtain the indent of a line'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_inde',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'indk',
+      alloced = true,
+      defaults = { if_true = '0{,0},0),0],:,0#,!^F,o,O,e' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
+        the current line.  Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
+        The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
+        See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'indentkeys',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_("keys that trigger indenting with 'indentexpr'"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_indk',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'inf',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
+        'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending
+        on the typed text.  If the typed text contains a lowercase letter
+        where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made
+        lowercase.  If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match
+        has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter,
+        and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase.
+        With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'infercase',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('adjust case of match for keyword completion'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_inf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'im',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      full_name = 'insertmode',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      immutable = true,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'isf',
+      cb = 'did_set_isopt',
+      defaults = {
+        condition = 'BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
+        if_false = '@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=',
+        if_true = '@,48-57,/,\\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],@-@,!,~,=',
+        doc = [[for Windows:
+      "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],@-@,!,~,="
+     otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="]],
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
+        path names.  Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
+        the tags file.  It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
+        Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
+        characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
+        For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
+        Think twice before adding white space to this option.  Although a
+        space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim
+        doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion.
+        It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'.
+
+        Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
+        do its best to make it work as you would expect.  That is a bit
+        tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
+        characters.  Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
+        name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes.  The
+        '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
+        cmd.exe.
+
+        The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
+        Each part can be a single character number or a range.  A range is two
+        character numbers with '-' in between.  A character number can be a
+        decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
+        not work for digits).  Example:
+        	"_,-,128-140,#-43"	(include '_' and '-' and the range
+        				128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
+        If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
+        will be excluded from the option.  The option is interpreted from left
+        to right.  Put the excluded character after the range where it is
+        included.  To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
+        option or the end of a range.  Example:
+        	"^a-z,#,^"	(exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
+        If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
+        are included.  Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
+        plus accented characters.  To include '@' itself use "@-@".  Examples:
+        	"@,^a-z"	All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
+        			case ASCII letters.
+        	"a-z,A-Z,@-@"	All letters plus the '@' character.
+        A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
+        expected.  Example:
+        	"48-57,,,_"	Digits, comma and underscore.
+        A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'.  Example:
+        	" -~,^,,9"	All characters from space to '~', excluding
+        			comma, plus <Tab>.
+        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'isfname',
+      list = 'comma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('characters included in file names and pathnames'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_isf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'isi',
+      cb = 'did_set_isopt',
+      defaults = {
+        condition = 'MSWIN',
+        if_false = '@,48-57,_,192-255',
+        if_true = '@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235',
+        doc = [[for Windows:
+                    "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
+         otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255"]],
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
+        Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
+        match of the 'define' option.  It is also used for "\i" in a
+        |pattern|.  See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
+        option.  For '@' only characters up to 255 are used.
+        Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
+        environment variables.  E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
+        expand "$HOME/.local/state/nvim/shada/main.shada".  Maybe you should
+        change 'iskeyword' instead.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'isident',
+      list = 'comma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('characters included in identifiers'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_isi',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'isk',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_isopt',
+      defaults = { if_true = '@,48-57,_,192-255' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
+        "w", "*", "[i", etc.  It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|.  See
+        'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.  For '@'
+        characters above 255 check the "word" character class (any character
+        that is not white space or punctuation).
+        For C programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
+        For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
+        "*", '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
+        command).
+        When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
+        This option also influences syntax highlighting, unless the syntax
+        uses |:syn-iskeyword|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'iskeyword',
+      list = 'comma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('characters included in keywords'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_isk',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'isp',
+      cb = 'did_set_isopt',
+      defaults = { if_true = '@,161-255' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
+        screen.  It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|.  The characters from
+        space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
+        even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded.  See
+        'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.
+
+        Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
+        	  0 -  31	"^@" - "^_"
+        	 32 - 126	always single characters
+        	   127		"^?"
+        	128 - 159	"~@" - "~_"
+        	160 - 254	"| " - "|~"
+        	   255		"~?"
+        Illegal bytes from 128 to 255 (invalid UTF-8) are
+        displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
+        When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
+        displayed as <xx>.
+        The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
+        |hl-SpecialKey|
+
+        Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
+        characters up to 255 are specified with this option.  When a character
+        is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
+        replacement character will be shown.
+        Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
+        There is no option to specify these characters.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'isprint',
+      list = 'comma',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('printable characters'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_isp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'js',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
+        Otherwise only one space is inserted.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'joinspaces',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('two spaces after a period with a join command'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_js',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'jop',
+      cb = 'did_set_jumpoptions',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        List of words that change the behavior of the |jumplist|.
+          stack         Make the jumplist behave like the tagstack.
+        		Relative location of entries in the jumplist is
+        		preserved at the cost of discarding subsequent entries
+        		when navigating backwards in the jumplist and then
+        		jumping to a location.  |jumplist-stack|
+
+          view          When moving through the jumplist, |changelist|,
+        		|alternate-file| or using |mark-motions| try to
+        		restore the |mark-view| in which the action occurred.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_jumpoptions',
+      full_name = 'jumpoptions',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Controls the behavior of the jumplist'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_jop',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'kmp',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_keymap',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Name of a keyboard mapping.  See |mbyte-keymap|.
+        Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
+        setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
+        'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
+        Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'keymap',
+      normal_fname_chars = true,
+      pri_mkrc = true,
+      pv_name = 'p_kmap',
+      redraw = { 'statuslines', 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('name of a keyboard mapping'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_keymap',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'km',
+      cb = 'did_set_keymodel',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        List of comma-separated words, which enable special things that keys
+        can do.  These values can be used:
+           startsel	Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
+        		Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
+        		present in 'selectmode').
+           stopsel	Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
+        Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
+        <PageUp> and <PageDown>.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_keymodel',
+      full_name = 'keymodel',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('enable starting/stopping selection with keys'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_km',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'kp',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = ':Man',
+        doc = '":Man", Windows: ":help"',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Program to use for the |K| command.  Environment variables are
+        expanded |:set_env|.  ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
+        help.  (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
+        value did this, which is now deprecated.)
+        When the first character is ":", the command is invoked as a Vim
+        Ex command prefixed with [count].
+        When "man" or "man -s" is used, Vim will automatically translate
+        a [count] for the "K" command to a section number.
+        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+        Example: >
+        	:set keywordprg=man\ -s
+        	:set keywordprg=:Man
+        <	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'keywordprg',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('program to use for the "K" command'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_kp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lmap',
+      cb = 'did_set_langmap',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
+        mode.  When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
+        inserted directly.  When in Normal mode the 'langmap' option takes
+        care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
+        of the key.  This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
+        be able to execute Normal mode commands.
+        This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
+        mapped in Insert mode.
+        Also consider setting 'langremap' to off, to prevent 'langmap' from
+        applying to characters resulting from a mapping.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+
+        Example (for Greek, in UTF-8):				*greek*  >
+            :set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz
+        <	Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >
+            :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
+        <
+        The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas.  Each
+        part can be in one of two forms:
+        1.  A list of pairs.  Each pair is a "from" character immediately
+            followed by the "to" character.  Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
+        2.  A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to"
+            characters.  Example: "abc;ABC"
+        Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
+        Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash.  These are
+        ";", ',', '"', '|' and backslash itself.
+
+        This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
+        back and forth between the languages.  Your language characters will
+        be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
+        langmap mappings) in the following cases:
+         o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
+         o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
+         o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
+        Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
+        this option.   Note that this option can be changed at any time
+        allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
+        Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'langmap',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('alphabetic characters for other language mode'),
+      tags = { 'E357', 'E358' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_langmap',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lm',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Language to use for menu translation.  Tells which file is loaded
+        from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >
+        	"lang/menu_" .. &langmenu .. ".vim"
+        <	(without the spaces).  For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
+        matter what $LANG is set to: >
+        	:set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
+        <	When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
+        Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
+        If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
+        the English menus: >
+        	:set langmenu=none
+        <	This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
+        detection or syntax highlighting.  Once the menus are defined setting
+        this option has no effect.  But you could do this: >
+        	:source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
+        	:set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
+        	:source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
+        <	Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'langmenu',
+      normal_fname_chars = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('language to be used for the menus'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_lm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lnr',
+      cb = 'did_set_langnoremap',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      full_name = 'langnoremap',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("do not apply 'langmap' to mapped characters"),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_lnr',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lrm',
+      cb = 'did_set_langremap',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When off, setting 'langmap' does not apply to characters resulting from
+        a mapping.  If setting 'langmap' disables some of your mappings, make
+        sure this option is off.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'langremap',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_lrm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ls',
+      cb = 'did_set_laststatus',
+      defaults = { if_true = 2 },
+      desc = [=[
+        The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
+        status line:
+        	0: never
+        	1: only if there are at least two windows
+        	2: always
+        	3: always and ONLY the last window
+        The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
+        windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'laststatus',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('tells when last window has status lines'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_ls',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lz',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
+        executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
+        typed.  Also, updating the window title is postponed.  To force an
+        update use |:redraw|.
+        This may occasionally cause display errors.  It is only meant to be set
+        temporarily when performing an operation where redrawing may cause
+        flickering or cause a slow down.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'lazyredraw',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("don't redraw while executing macros"),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_lz',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lbr',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        If on, Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
+        than at the last character that fits on the screen.  Unlike
+        'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
+        it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents.
+        If 'breakindent' is set, line is visually indented. Then, the value
+        of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines. This option
+        is not used when the 'wrap' option is off.
+        Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
+        with the right amount of white space.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'linebreak',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('wrap long lines at a blank'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = macros('DFLT_ROWS'),
+        doc = '24 or terminal height',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Number of lines of the Vim window.
+        Normally you don't need to set this.  It is done automatically by the
+        terminal initialization code.
+        When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
+        option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
+        to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
+        Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen.  You can
+        use this command to get the tallest window possible: >
+        	:set lines=999
+        <	Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'lines',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('of lines in the display'),
+      tags = { 'E593' },
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_lines',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lsp',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        		only in the GUI
+        Number of pixel lines inserted between characters.  Useful if the font
+        uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
+        When non-zero there is room for underlining.
+        With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have
+        space for ascents and descents).  Then it makes sense to set
+        'linespace' to a negative value.  This may cause display problems
+        though!
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'linespace',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of pixel lines to use between characters'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_linespace',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_lisp',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
+        the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of).  Also happens with
+        "cc" or "S".  'autoindent' must also be on for this to work.  The 'p'
+        flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or
+        better.  Also see 'lispwords'.
+        The '-' character is included in keyword characters.  Redefines the
+        "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
+        calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'lisp',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('indenting for Lisp'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_lisp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lop',
+      cb = 'did_set_lispoptions',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Comma-separated list of items that influence the Lisp indenting when
+        enabled with the |'lisp'| option.  Currently only one item is
+        supported:
+        	expr:1	use 'indentexpr' for Lisp indenting when it is set
+        	expr:0	do not use 'indentexpr' for Lisp indenting (default)
+        Note that when using 'indentexpr' the `=` operator indents all the
+        lines, otherwise the first line is not indented (Vi-compatible).
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_lispoptions',
+      full_name = 'lispoptions',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      pv_name = 'p_lop',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('options for lisp indenting'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_lop',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lw',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = macros('LISPWORD_VALUE'),
+        doc = 'is very long',
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Comma-separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting when
+        enabled with the |'lisp'| option.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'lispwords',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      pv_name = 'p_lw',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('words that change how lisp indenting works'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_lispwords',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        List mode: By default, show tabs as ">", trailing spaces as "-", and
+        non-breakable space characters as "+". Useful to see the difference
+        between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks. Further changed by
+        the 'listchars' option.
+
+        The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character
+        occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode.  To get this cursor
+        position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: >
+        	:set list lcs=tab:\ \
+        <
+        Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth'
+        or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'.  See 'listchars' for
+        changing the way tabs are displayed.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'list',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('<Tab> and <EOL>'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lcs',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_chars_option',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'tab:> ,trail:-,nbsp:+' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
+        comma-separated list of string settings.
+
+        						*lcs-eol*
+          eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
+        		omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
+        		line.
+        						*lcs-tab*
+          tab:xy[z]	Two or three characters to be used to show a tab.
+        		The third character is optional.
+
+          tab:xy	The 'x' is always used, then 'y' as many times as will
+        		fit.  Thus "tab:>-" displays: >
+        			>
+        			>-
+        			>--
+        			etc.
+        <
+          tab:xyz	The 'z' is always used, then 'x' is prepended, and
+        		then 'y' is used as many times as will fit.  Thus
+        		"tab:<->" displays: >
+        			>
+        			<>
+        			<->
+        			<-->
+        			etc.
+        <
+        		When "tab:" is omitted, a tab is shown as ^I.
+        						*lcs-space*
+          space:c	Character to show for a space.  When omitted, spaces
+        		are left blank.
+        						*lcs-multispace*
+          multispace:c...
+        		One or more characters to use cyclically to show for
+        		multiple consecutive spaces.  Overrides the "space"
+        		setting, except for single spaces.  When omitted, the
+        		"space" setting is used.  For example,
+        		`:set listchars=multispace:---+` shows ten consecutive
+        		spaces as: >
+        			---+---+--
+        <
+        						*lcs-lead*
+          lead:c	Character to show for leading spaces.  When omitted,
+        		leading spaces are blank.  Overrides the "space" and
+        		"multispace" settings for leading spaces.  You can
+        		combine it with "tab:", for example: >
+        			:set listchars+=tab:>-,lead:.
+        <
+        						*lcs-leadmultispace*
+          leadmultispace:c...
+        		Like the |lcs-multispace| value, but for leading
+        		spaces only.  Also overrides |lcs-lead| for leading
+        		multiple spaces.
+        		`:set listchars=leadmultispace:---+` shows ten
+        		consecutive leading spaces as: >
+        			---+---+--XXX
+        <
+        		Where "XXX" denotes the first non-blank characters in
+        		the line.
+        						*lcs-trail*
+          trail:c	Character to show for trailing spaces.  When omitted,
+        		trailing spaces are blank.  Overrides the "space" and
+        		"multispace" settings for trailing spaces.
+        						*lcs-extends*
+          extends:c	Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
+        		off and the line continues beyond the right of the
+        		screen.
+        						*lcs-precedes*
+          precedes:c	Character to show in the first visible column of the
+        		physical line, when there is text preceding the
+        		character visible in the first column.
+        						*lcs-conceal*
+          conceal:c	Character to show in place of concealed text, when
+        		'conceallevel' is set to 1.  A space when omitted.
+        						*lcs-nbsp*
+          nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space character
+        		(0xA0 (160 decimal) and U+202F).  Left blank when
+        		omitted.
+
+        The characters ':' and ',' should not be used.  UTF-8 characters can
+        be used.  All characters must be single width.
+
+        Each character can be specified as hex: >
+        	set listchars=eol:\\x24
+        	set listchars=eol:\\u21b5
+        	set listchars=eol:\\U000021b5
+        <	Note that a double backslash is used.  The number of hex characters
+        must be exactly 2 for \\x, 4 for \\u and 8 for \\U.
+
+        Examples: >
+            :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
+            :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
+            :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
+        <	|hl-NonText| highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
+        "precedes". |hl-Whitespace| for "nbsp", "space", "tab", "multispace",
+        "lead" and "trail".
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_chars_option',
+      full_name = 'listchars',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'global', 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('characters for displaying in list mode'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_lcs',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'lpl',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
+        This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
+        of plugins.
+        Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
+        reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'loadplugins',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('load plugin scripts when starting up'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_lpl',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns.
+        See |pattern|.
+        WARNING: Switching this option off most likely breaks plugins!  That
+        is because many patterns assume it's on and will fail when it's off.
+        Only switch it off when working with old Vi scripts.  In any other
+        situation write patterns that work when 'magic' is on.  Include "\M"
+        when you want to |/\M|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'magic',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('special characters in search patterns'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_magic',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mef',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
+        and the |:grep| command.
+        When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
+        When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
+        unique.  This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
+        existing file.
+        NOT used for the ":cf" command.  See 'errorfile' for that.
+        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'makeef',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('name of the errorfile for ":make"'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_mef',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'menc',
+      cb = 'did_set_encoding',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Encoding used for reading the output of external commands.  When empty,
+        encoding is not converted.
+        This is used for `:make`, `:lmake`, `:grep`, `:lgrep`, `:grepadd`,
+        `:lgrepadd`, `:cfile`, `:cgetfile`, `:caddfile`, `:lfile`, `:lgetfile`,
+        and `:laddfile`.
+
+        This would be mostly useful when you use MS-Windows.  If iconv is
+        enabled, setting 'makeencoding' to "char" has the same effect as
+        setting to the system locale encoding.  Example: >
+        	:set makeencoding=char	" system locale is used
+        <
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_encoding',
+      full_name = 'makeencoding',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('Converts the output of external commands'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_menc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mp',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'make' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Program to use for the ":make" command.  See |:make_makeprg|.
+        This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see  |:_%| and |:_#|),
+        which are expanded to the current and alternate file name.  Use |::S|
+        to escape file names in case they contain special characters.
+        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
+        about including spaces and backslashes.
+        Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for
+        the interpretation of a command.  When you use a filter called
+        "myfilter" do it like this: >
+            :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
+        <	The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
+        where the arguments will be included, for example: >
+            :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
+        <	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'makeprg',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('program to use for the ":make" command'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_mp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mps',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_matchpairs',
+      defaults = { if_true = '(:),{:},[:]' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Characters that form pairs.  The |%| command jumps from one to the
+        other.
+        Only character pairs are allowed that are different, thus you cannot
+        jump between two double quotes.
+        The characters must be separated by a colon.
+        The pairs must be separated by a comma.  Example for including '<' and
+        '>' (for HTML): >
+        	:set mps+=<:>
+
+        <	A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
+        assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >
+        	:au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;
+
+        <	For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
+        the $VIMRUNTIME/plugin directory. |add-local-help|
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'matchpairs',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('pairs of characters that "%" can match'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_mps',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mat',
+      defaults = { if_true = 5 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
+        set.  Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
+        set a time.  This is to be compatible with Nvi.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'matchtime',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('tenths of a second to show matching paren'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_mat',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mco',
+      defaults = { if_true = 6 },
+      full_name = 'maxcombine',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum nr of combining characters displayed'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_mco',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mfd',
+      defaults = { if_true = 100 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum depth of function calls for user functions.  This normally
+        catches endless recursion.  When using a recursive function with
+        more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number.  But this will use
+        more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
+        Increasing this limit above 200 also changes the maximum for Ex
+        command recursion, see |E169|.
+        See also |:function|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'maxfuncdepth',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum recursive depth for user functions'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_mfd',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mmd',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1000 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
+        character to be used.  This normally catches endless mappings, like
+        ":map x y" with ":map y x".  It still does not catch ":map g wg",
+        because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done.  See also
+        |key-mapping|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'maxmapdepth',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum recursive depth for mapping'),
+      tags = { 'E223' },
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_mmd',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mmp',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1000 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching.
+        The maximum value is about 2000000.  Use this to work without a limit.
+        						*E363*
+        When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly
+        behaves like CTRL-C was typed.
+        Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very
+        inefficient or too complex.  This may already happen with the pattern
+        "\(.\)*" on a very long line.  ".*" works much better.
+        Might also happen on redraw, when syntax rules try to match a complex
+        text structure.
+        Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit, in
+        which case you get an "Out of memory" error instead.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'maxmempattern',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum memory (in Kbyte) used for pattern search'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_mmp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mis',
+      defaults = { if_true = 25 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum number of items to use in a menu.  Used for menus that are
+        generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu.  Changing this
+        option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'menuitems',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum number of items in a menu'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_mis',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'msm',
+      cb = 'did_set_mkspellmem',
+      defaults = { if_true = '460000,2000,500' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Parameters for |:mkspell|.  This tunes when to start compressing the
+        word tree.  Compression can be slow when there are many words, but
+        it's needed to avoid running out of memory.  The amount of memory used
+        per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why
+        this tuning is complicated.
+
+        There are three numbers, separated by commas: >
+        	{start},{inc},{added}
+        <
+        For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory.  {start}
+        gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any
+        compression is done.  It should be a bit smaller than the amount of
+        memory that is available to Vim.
+
+        When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the
+        amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another
+        compression is done.  A low number means compression is done after
+        less words are added, which is slow.  A high number means more memory
+        will be allocated.
+
+        After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before
+        the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra
+        amount of memory is needed.  A low number means there is a smaller
+        chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's
+        slower.
+
+        The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and
+        Hungarian.  The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte.  If
+        you have 1 Gbyte you could use: >
+        	:set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800
+        <	If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some
+        languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to.
+
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'mkspellmem',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('memory used before |:mkspell| compresses the tree'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_msm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ml',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = true,
+        doc = 'on (off for root)',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
+        checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
+        no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'modeline',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('recognize modelines at start or end of file'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ml',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mle',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on allow some options that are an expression to be set in the
+        modeline.  Check the option for whether it is affected by
+        'modelineexpr'.  Also see |modeline|.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'modelineexpr',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('allow some options to be set in modeline'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_mle',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mls',
+      defaults = { if_true = 5 },
+      desc = [=[
+        If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
+        checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
+        no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.
+
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'modelines',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of lines checked for modelines'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_mls',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ma',
+      cb = 'did_set_modifiable',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When off the buffer contents cannot be changed.  The 'fileformat' and
+        'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
+        Can be reset on startup with the |-M| command line argument.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'modifiable',
+      noglob = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('changes to the text are not possible'),
+      tags = { 'E21' },
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ma',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mod',
+      cb = 'did_set_modified',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, the buffer is considered to be modified.  This option is set
+        when:
+        1. A change was made to the text since it was last written.  Using the
+           |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
+           option.  But undoing changes that were made before writing the
+           buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
+           when it was written.
+        2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
+           value.  The original value is set when the buffer is read or
+           written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
+           values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
+           reset.
+           Similarly for 'eol' and 'bomb'.
+        This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the
+        result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,
+        FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event.  See |gzip-example| for
+        an explanation.
+        When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
+        will be ignored.
+        Note that the text may actually be the same, e.g. 'modified' is set
+        when using "rA" on an "A".
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'modified',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('buffer has been modified'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_mod',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled.  You will get
+        the |more-prompt|.  When this option is off there are no pauses, the
+        listing continues until finished.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'more',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('listings when the whole screen is filled'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_more',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_mouse',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'nvi' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Enables mouse support. For example, to enable the mouse in Normal mode
+        and Visual mode: >
+        	:set mouse=nv
+        <
+        To temporarily disable mouse support, hold the shift key while using
+        the mouse.
+
+        Mouse support can be enabled for different modes:
+        	n	Normal mode
+        	v	Visual mode
+        	i	Insert mode
+        	c	Command-line mode
+        	h	all previous modes when editing a help file
+        	a	all previous modes
+        	r	for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt
+
+        Left-click anywhere in a text buffer to place the cursor there.  This
+        works with operators too, e.g. type |d| then left-click to delete text
+        from the current cursor position to the position where you clicked.
+
+        Drag the |status-line| or vertical separator of a window to resize it.
+
+        If enabled for "v" (Visual mode) then double-click selects word-wise,
+        triple-click makes it line-wise, and quadruple-click makes it
+        rectangular block-wise.
+
+        For scrolling with a mouse wheel see |scroll-mouse-wheel|.
+
+        Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
+        "* register if possible. See also 'clipboard'.
+
+        Related options:
+        'mousefocus'	window focus follows mouse pointer
+        'mousemodel'	what mouse button does which action
+        'mousehide'	hide mouse pointer while typing text
+        'selectmode'	whether to start Select mode or Visual mode
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_mouse',
+      full_name = 'mouse',
+      list = 'flags',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('the use of mouse clicks'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_mouse',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mousef',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
+        When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
+        mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus.  Off is the
+        default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
+        a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'mousefocus',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('keyboard focus follows the mouse'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_mousef',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mh',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        		only in the GUI
+        When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
+        The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = false,
+      full_name = 'mousehide',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('hide mouse pointer while typing'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_mh',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mousem',
+      cb = 'did_set_mousemodel',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'popup_setpos' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Sets the model to use for the mouse.  The name mostly specifies what
+        the right mouse button is used for:
+           extend	Right mouse button extends a selection.  This works
+        		like in an xterm.
+           popup	Right mouse button pops up a menu.  The shifted left
+        		mouse button extends a selection.  This works like
+        		with Microsoft Windows.
+           popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
+        		position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
+        		selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
+        		If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
+        		be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move.  This implies of
+        		course, that right clicking outside a selection will
+        		end Visual mode.
+        Overview of what button does what for each model:
+        mouse		    extend		popup(_setpos) ~
+        left click	    place cursor	place cursor
+        left drag	    start selection	start selection
+        shift-left	    search word		extend selection
+        right click	    extend selection	popup menu (place cursor)
+        right drag	    extend selection	-
+        middle click	    paste		paste
+
+        In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
+        Nvim creates a default |popup-menu| but you can redefine it.
+
+        Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
+        See |mouse-overview|.  But mappings are NOT used for modeless selection.
+
+        Example: >
+           :map <S-LeftMouse>     <RightMouse>
+           :map <S-LeftDrag>      <RightDrag>
+           :map <S-LeftRelease>   <RightRelease>
+           :map <2-S-LeftMouse>   <2-RightMouse>
+           :map <2-S-LeftDrag>    <2-RightDrag>
+           :map <2-S-LeftRelease> <2-RightRelease>
+           :map <3-S-LeftMouse>   <3-RightMouse>
+           :map <3-S-LeftDrag>    <3-RightDrag>
+           :map <3-S-LeftRelease> <3-RightRelease>
+           :map <4-S-LeftMouse>   <4-RightMouse>
+           :map <4-S-LeftDrag>    <4-RightDrag>
+           :map <4-S-LeftRelease> <4-RightRelease>
+        <
+        Mouse commands requiring the CTRL modifier can be simulated by typing
+        the "g" key before using the mouse:
+            "g<LeftMouse>"  is "<C-LeftMouse>	(jump to tag under mouse click)
+            "g<RightMouse>" is "<C-RightMouse>	("CTRL-T")
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_mousemodel',
+      full_name = 'mousemodel',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('changes meaning of mouse buttons'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_mousem',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mousemev',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, mouse move events are delivered to the input queue and are
+        available for mapping. The default, off, avoids the mouse movement
+        overhead except when needed.
+        Warning: Setting this option can make pending mappings to be aborted
+        when the mouse is moved.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'mousemoveevent',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('deliver mouse move events to input queue'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_mousemev',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_mousescroll',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'ver:3,hor:6' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option controls the number of lines / columns to scroll by when
+        scrolling with a mouse wheel (|scroll-mouse-wheel|). The option is
+        a comma-separated list. Each part consists of a direction and a count
+        as follows:
+        	direction:count,direction:count
+        Direction is one of either "hor" or "ver". "hor" controls horizontal
+        scrolling and "ver" controls vertical scrolling. Count sets the amount
+        to scroll by for the given direction, it should be a non negative
+        integer. Each direction should be set at most once. If a direction
+        is omitted, a default value is used (6 for horizontal scrolling and 3
+        for vertical scrolling). You can disable mouse scrolling by using
+        a count of 0.
+
+        Example: >
+        	:set mousescroll=ver:5,hor:2
+        <	Will make Nvim scroll 5 lines at a time when scrolling vertically, and
+        scroll 2 columns at a time when scrolling horizontally.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_mousescroll',
+      full_name = 'mousescroll',
+      list = 'comma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('amount to scroll by when scrolling with a mouse'),
+      tags = { 'E5080' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_mousescroll',
+      vi_def = true,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mouses',
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = '',
+        doc = [["i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
+            m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow"]],
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
+        different modes.  The option is a comma-separated list of parts, much
+        like used for 'guicursor'.  Each part consist of a mode/location-list
+        and an argument-list:
+        	mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
+        The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
+        		In a normal window: ~
+        	n	Normal mode
+        	v	Visual mode
+        	ve	Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
+        		if not specified)
+        	o	Operator-pending mode
+        	i	Insert mode
+        	r	Replace mode
+
+        		Others: ~
+        	c	appending to the command-line
+        	ci	inserting in the command-line
+        	cr	replacing in the command-line
+        	m	at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
+        	ml	idem, but cursor in the last line
+        	e	any mode, pointer below last window
+        	s	any mode, pointer on a status line
+        	sd	any mode, while dragging a status line
+        	vs	any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
+        	vd	any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
+        	a	everywhere
+
+        The shape is one of the following:
+        avail	name		looks like ~
+        w x	arrow		Normal mouse pointer
+        w x	blank		no pointer at all (use with care!)
+        w x	beam		I-beam
+        w x	updown		up-down sizing arrows
+        w x	leftright	left-right sizing arrows
+        w x	busy		The system's usual busy pointer
+        w x	no		The system's usual "no input" pointer
+          x	udsizing	indicates up-down resizing
+          x	lrsizing	indicates left-right resizing
+          x	crosshair	like a big thin +
+          x	hand1		black hand
+          x	hand2		white hand
+          x	pencil		what you write with
+          x	question	big ?
+          x	rightup-arrow	arrow pointing right-up
+        w x	up-arrow	arrow pointing up
+          x	<number>	any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)
+
+        The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
+        x for X11.
+        Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse
+        pointer.
+
+        Example: >
+        	:set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
+        <	will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
+        indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
+        clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = false,
+      full_name = 'mouseshape',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('shape of the mouse pointer in different modes'),
+      tags = { 'E547' },
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'mouset',
+      defaults = { if_true = 500 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Defines the maximum time in msec between two mouse clicks for the
+        second click to be recognized as a multi click.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'mousetime',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('max time between mouse double-click'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_mouset',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'nf',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_nrformats',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'bin,hex' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
+        CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
+        respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
+        alpha	If included, single alphabetical characters will be
+        	incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
+        	letter index a), b), etc.		*octal-nrformats*
+        octal	If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
+        	to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
+        hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
+        	considered to be hexadecimal.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
+        	"0x100" results in "0x0ff".
+        bin	If included, numbers starting with "0b" or "0B" will be
+        	considered to be binary.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
+        	"0b1000" subtracts one, resulting in "0b0111".
+        unsigned    If included, numbers are recognized as unsigned. Thus a
+        	leading dash or negative sign won't be considered as part of
+        	the number.  Examples:
+        	    Using CTRL-X on "2020" in "9-2020" results in "9-2019"
+        	    (without "unsigned" it would become "9-2021").
+        	    Using CTRL-A on "2020" in "9-2020" results in "9-2021"
+        	    (without "unsigned" it would become "9-2019").
+        	    Using CTRL-X on "0" or CTRL-A on "18446744073709551615"
+        	    (2^64 - 1) has no effect, overflow is prevented.
+        Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
+        considered decimal.  This also happens for numbers that are not
+        recognized as octal or hex.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_nrformats',
+      full_name = 'nrformats',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('number formats recognized for CTRL-A command'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_nf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'nu',
+      cb = 'did_set_number_relativenumber',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Print the line number in front of each line.  When the 'n' option is
+        excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
+        line numbers.
+        Use the 'numberwidth' option to adjust the room for the line number.
+        When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
+        characters are put before the number.
+        For highlighting see |hl-LineNr|, |hl-CursorLineNr|, and the
+        |:sign-define| "numhl" argument.
+        					*number_relativenumber*
+        The 'relativenumber' option changes the displayed number to be
+        relative to the cursor.  Together with 'number' there are these
+        four combinations (cursor in line 3):
+
+        	'nonu'          'nu'            'nonu'          'nu'
+        	'nornu'         'nornu'         'rnu'           'rnu'
+        >
+            |apple          |  1 apple      |  2 apple      |  2 apple
+            |pear           |  2 pear       |  1 pear       |  1 pear
+            |nobody         |  3 nobody     |  0 nobody     |3   nobody
+            |there          |  4 there      |  1 there      |  1 there
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'number',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('print the line number in front of each line'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'nuw',
+      cb = 'did_set_numberwidth',
+      defaults = { if_true = 4 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Minimal number of columns to use for the line number.  Only relevant
+        when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines
+        with a line number. Since one space is always between the number and
+        the text, there is one less character for the number itself.
+        The value is the minimum width.  A bigger width is used when needed to
+        fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of
+        rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber'
+        is set. Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line number
+        up to 999. When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be used.
+        The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 20.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'numberwidth',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of columns used for the line number'),
+      type = 'number',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ofu',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_omnifunc',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni
+        completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
+        See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
+        invoked and what it should return.  The value can be the name of a
+        function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|. See |option-value-function| for
+        more information.
+        This option is usually set by a filetype plugin:
+        |:filetype-plugin-on|
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'omnifunc',
+      func = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('function for filetype-specific completion'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ofu',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'odev',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        		only for Windows
+        Enable reading and writing from devices.  This may get Vim stuck on a
+        device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O.  Therefore
+        it is off by default.
+        Note that on Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also
+        result in editing a device.
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = false,
+      full_name = 'opendevice',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('allow reading/writing devices on MS-Windows'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'opfunc',
+      cb = 'did_set_operatorfunc',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator.
+        See |:map-operator| for more info and an example.  The value can be
+        the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|. See
+        |option-value-function| for more information.
+
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'operatorfunc',
+      func = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('function to be called for |g@| operator'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_opfunc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pp',
+      cb = 'did_set_runtimepackpath',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = '',
+        doc = "see 'runtimepath'",
+        meta = '...',
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Directories used to find packages.
+        See |packages| and |packages-runtimepath|.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'packpath',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('list of directories used for packages'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_pp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'para',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs.  These are pairs
+        of two letters (see |object-motions|).
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'paragraphs',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('nroff macros that separate paragraphs'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_para',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_paste',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      full_name = 'paste',
+      pri_mkrc = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('pasting text'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_paste',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pt',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      full_name = 'pastetoggle',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pex',
+      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
+        the resulting new version of the file.  See |diff-patchexpr|.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'patchexpr',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('expression used to patch a file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_pex',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pm',
+      cb = 'did_set_backupext_or_patchmode',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept.  This can be used
+        to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
+        source distribution.  Only the first time that a file is written a
+        copy of the original file will be kept.  The name of the copy is the
+        name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
+        appended.  This option should start with a dot.  Use a string like
+        ".orig" or ".org".  'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work
+        (Detail: The backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the
+        new file has been successfully written, that's why it must be possible
+        to write a backup file).  If there was no file to be backed up, an
+        empty file is created.
+        When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
+        Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
+        end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
+        recognized as a compressed file.
+        Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'patchmode',
+      normal_fname_chars = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('keep the oldest version of a file'),
+      tags = { 'E205', 'E206' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_pm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pa',
+      defaults = { if_true = '.,,' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
+        |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands,
+        provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not
+        starting with "/", "./" or "../").  The directories in the 'path'
+        option may be relative or absolute.
+        - Use commas to separate directory names: >
+        	:set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
+        <	- Spaces can also be used to separate directory names.  To have a
+          space in a directory name, precede it with an extra backslash, and
+          escape the space: >
+        	:set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
+        <	- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
+          backslash: >
+        	:set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
+        <	- To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >
+        	:set path=.
+        <	- To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
+          commas: >
+        	:set path=,,
+        <	- A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
+        - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+        - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used.  For example, adding
+          "https://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
+        - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and
+          ";".  See |file-searching| for info and syntax.
+        - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >
+        	:set path=.,c:\\include
+        <	  Or just use '/' instead: >
+        	:set path=.,c:/include
+        <	Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
+        the file!
+        The maximum length is limited.  How much depends on the system, mostly
+        it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
+        You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
+        'path', see |:checkpath|.
+        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+        uses another default.  To remove the current directory use: >
+        	:set path-=
+        <	To add the current directory use: >
+        	:set path+=
+        <	To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
+        separator.  Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
+        names are separated with a semi-colon: >
+        	:let &path = &path .. "," .. substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
+        <	Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used.  Note that
+        this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'path',
+      list = 'comma',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('list of directories searched with "gf" et.al.'),
+      tags = { 'E343', 'E345', 'E347', 'E854' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_path',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pi',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
+        indent structure as possible.  Normally the indent is replaced by a
+        series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is
+        enabled, in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option
+        means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
+        for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
+        'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains
+        a Tab.
+        NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
+        tabs and spaces.  You might not like this.
+        Also see 'copyindent'.
+        Use |:retab| to clean up white space.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'preserveindent',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('preserve the indent structure when reindenting'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_pi',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pvh',
+      defaults = { if_true = 12 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Default height for a preview window.  Used for |:ptag| and associated
+        commands.  Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'previewheight',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('height of the preview window'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_pvh',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pvw',
+      cb = 'did_set_previewwindow',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Identifies the preview window.  Only one window can have this option
+        set.  It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
+        |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'previewwindow',
+      noglob = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('identifies the preview window'),
+      tags = { 'E590' },
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      full_name = 'prompt',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('enable prompt in Ex mode'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      immutable = true,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pb',
+      cb = 'did_set_pumblend',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Enables pseudo-transparency for the |popup-menu|. Valid values are in
+        the range of 0 for fully opaque popupmenu (disabled) to 100 for fully
+        transparent background. Values between 0-30 are typically most useful.
+
+        It is possible to override the level for individual highlights within
+        the popupmenu using |highlight-blend|. For instance, to enable
+        transparency but force the current selected element to be fully opaque: >
+
+        	:set pumblend=15
+        	:hi PmenuSel blend=0
+        <
+        UI-dependent. Works best with RGB colors. 'termguicolors'
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'pumblend',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Controls transparency level of popup menu'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_pb',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ph',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum number of items to show in the popup menu
+        (|ins-completion-menu|). Zero means "use available screen space".
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'pumheight',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum height of the popup menu'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_ph',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pw',
+      defaults = { if_true = 15 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Minimum width for the popup menu (|ins-completion-menu|).  If the
+        cursor column + 'pumwidth' exceeds screen width, the popup menu is
+        nudged to fit on the screen.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'pumwidth',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimum width of the popup menu'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_pw',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'pyx',
+      defaults = { if_true = 3 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Specifies the python version used for pyx* functions and commands
+        |python_x|.  As only Python 3 is supported, this always has the value
+        `3`. Setting any other value is an error.
+
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'pyxversion',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('selects default python version to use'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_pyx',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'qftf',
+      cb = 'did_set_quickfixtextfunc',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option specifies a function to be used to get the text to display
+        in the quickfix and location list windows.  This can be used to
+        customize the information displayed in the quickfix or location window
+        for each entry in the corresponding quickfix or location list.  See
+        |quickfix-window-function| for an explanation of how to write the
+        function and an example.  The value can be the name of a function, a
+        |lambda| or a |Funcref|. See |option-value-function| for more
+        information.
+
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'quickfixtextfunc',
+      func = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('customize the quickfix window'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_qftf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'qe',
+      alloced = true,
+      defaults = { if_true = '\\' },
+      desc = [=[
+        The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string.  Used for
+        objects like a', a" and a` |a'|.
+        When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,
+        the following character will be skipped.  The default value makes the
+        text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'quoteescape',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('escape characters used in a string'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_qe',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ro',
+      cb = 'did_set_readonly',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'.  Protects you from
+        accidentally overwriting a file.  Default on when Vim is started
+        in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
+        When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current
+        buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'.
+        When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is set for the
+        newly edited buffer.
+        See 'modifiable' for disallowing changes to the buffer.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'readonly',
+      noglob = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('disallow writing the buffer'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ro',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'rdb',
+      cb = 'did_set_redrawdebug',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Flags to change the way redrawing works, for debugging purposes.
+        Most useful with 'writedelay' set to some reasonable value.
+        Supports the following flags:
+            compositor	Indicate each redraw event handled by the compositor
+        		by briefly flashing the redrawn regions in colors
+        		indicating the redraw type. These are the highlight
+        		groups used (and their default colors):
+        	RedrawDebugNormal   gui=reverse   normal redraw passed through
+        	RedrawDebugClear    guibg=Yellow  clear event passed through
+        	RedrawDebugComposed guibg=Green   redraw event modified by the
+        					  compositor (due to
+        					  overlapping grids, etc)
+        	RedrawDebugRecompose guibg=Red    redraw generated by the
+        					  compositor itself, due to a
+        					  grid being moved or deleted.
+            line	introduce a delay after each line drawn on the screen.
+        		When using the TUI or another single-grid UI, "compositor"
+        		gives more information and should be preferred (every
+        		line is processed as a separate event by the compositor)
+            flush	introduce a delay after each "flush" event.
+            nothrottle	Turn off throttling of the message grid. This is an
+        		optimization that joins many small scrolls to one
+        		larger scroll when drawing the message area (with
+        		'display' msgsep flag active).
+            invalid	Enable stricter checking (abort) of inconsistencies
+        		of the internal screen state. This is mostly
+        		useful when running nvim inside a debugger (and
+        		the test suite).
+            nodelta	Send all internally redrawn cells to the UI, even if
+        		they are unchanged from the already displayed state.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'redrawdebug',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Changes the way redrawing works (debug)'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_rdb',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'rdt',
+      defaults = { if_true = 2000 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Time in milliseconds for redrawing the display.  Applies to
+        'hlsearch', 'inccommand', |:match| highlighting and syntax
+        highlighting.
+        When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further
+        matches will be highlighted.
+        For syntax highlighting the time applies per window.  When over the
+        limit syntax highlighting is disabled until |CTRL-L| is used.
+        This is used to avoid that Vim hangs when using a very complicated
+        pattern.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'redrawtime',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("timeout for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting"),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_rdt',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 're',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        This selects the default regexp engine. |two-engines|
+        The possible values are:
+        	0	automatic selection
+        	1	old engine
+        	2	NFA engine
+        Note that when using the NFA engine and the pattern contains something
+        that is not supported the pattern will not match.  This is only useful
+        for debugging the regexp engine.
+        Using automatic selection enables Vim to switch the engine, if the
+        default engine becomes too costly.  E.g., when the NFA engine uses too
+        many states.  This should prevent Vim from hanging on a combination of
+        a complex pattern with long text.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'regexpengine',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('default regexp engine to use'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_re',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'rnu',
+      cb = 'did_set_number_relativenumber',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of
+        each line. Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can
+        precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without
+        having to calculate it yourself. Especially useful in combination with
+        other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =).
+        When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped
+        line will not use the column of line numbers.
+        The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
+        number.
+        When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
+        characters are put before the number.
+        See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
+        the number.
+
+        The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of
+        'number', see |number_relativenumber| for all combinations of the two
+        options.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'relativenumber',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('show relative line number in front of each line'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      full_name = 'remap',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      immutable = true,
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = 2 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Threshold for reporting number of lines changed.  When the number of
+        changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
+        ":" commands.  If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
+        For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
+        instead of the number of lines.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'report',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('for reporting nr. of lines changed'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_report',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ri',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards.  See "typing
+        backwards" |ins-reverse|.  This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
+        command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'revins',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('inserting characters will work backwards'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ri',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'rl',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
+        that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
+        Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
+        are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
+        This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
+        simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
+        useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
+        and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
+        in different windows).  Also see |rileft.txt|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'rightleft',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('window is right-to-left oriented'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'rlc',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_rightleftcmd',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'search' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
+        right-to-left mode for a group of commands:
+
+        	search		"/" and "?" commands
+
+        This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
+        The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_rightleftcmd',
+      full_name = 'rightleftcmd',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('commands for which editing works right-to-left'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ru',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
+        comma.  When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
+        text in the file is shown on the far right:
+        	Top	first line is visible
+        	Bot	last line is visible
+        	All	first and last line are visible
+        	45%	relative position in the file
+        If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
+        Each window has its own ruler.  If a window has a status line, the
+        ruler is shown there.  If a window doesn't have a status line and
+        'cmdheight' is zero, the ruler is not shown.  Otherwise it is shown in
+        the last line of the screen.  If the statusline is given by
+        'statusline' (i.e. not empty), this option takes precedence over
+        'ruler' and 'rulerformat'.
+        If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
+        bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multibyte character), both
+        the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
+        separated with a dash.
+        For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
+        For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
+        If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
+        you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'ruler',
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('show cursor line and column in the status line'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ru',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ruf',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_rulerformat',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
+        string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
+        The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+
+        The default ruler width is 17 characters.  To make the ruler 15
+        characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
+        Example: >
+        	:set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'rulerformat',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('custom format for the ruler'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ruf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'rtp',
+      cb = 'did_set_runtimepackpath',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = '',
+        doc = [["$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/nvim,
+                     $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[1]/nvim,
+                     $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[2]/nvim,
+                     …
+                     $XDG_DATA_HOME/nvim[-data]/site,
+                     $XDG_DATA_DIRS[1]/nvim/site,
+                     $XDG_DATA_DIRS[2]/nvim/site,
+                     …
+                     $VIMRUNTIME,
+                     …
+                     $XDG_DATA_DIRS[2]/nvim/site/after,
+                     $XDG_DATA_DIRS[1]/nvim/site/after,
+                     $XDG_DATA_HOME/nvim[-data]/site/after,
+                     …
+                     $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[2]/nvim/after,
+                     $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[1]/nvim/after,
+                     $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/nvim/after"]],
+        meta = '...',
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        List of directories to be searched for these runtime files:
+          filetype.lua	filetypes |new-filetype|
+          autoload/	automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions|
+          colors/	color scheme files |:colorscheme|
+          compiler/	compiler files |:compiler|
+          doc/		documentation |write-local-help|
+          ftplugin/	filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
+          indent/	indent scripts |indent-expression|
+          keymap/	key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
+          lang/		menu translations |:menutrans|
+          lua/		|Lua| plugins
+          menu.vim	GUI menus |menu.vim|
+          pack/		packages |:packadd|
+          parser/	|treesitter| syntax parsers
+          plugin/	plugin scripts |write-plugin|
+          queries/	|treesitter| queries
+          rplugin/	|remote-plugin| scripts
+          spell/	spell checking files |spell|
+          syntax/	syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
+          tutor/	tutorial files |:Tutor|
+
+        And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.
+
+        Defaults are setup to search these locations:
+        1. Your home directory, for personal preferences.
+           Given by `stdpath("config")`.  |$XDG_CONFIG_HOME|
+        2. Directories which must contain configuration files according to
+           |xdg| ($XDG_CONFIG_DIRS, defaults to /etc/xdg).  This also contains
+           preferences from system administrator.
+        3. Data home directory, for plugins installed by user.
+           Given by `stdpath("data")/site`.  |$XDG_DATA_HOME|
+        4. nvim/site subdirectories for each directory in $XDG_DATA_DIRS.
+           This is for plugins which were installed by system administrator,
+           but are not part of the Nvim distribution. XDG_DATA_DIRS defaults
+           to /usr/local/share/:/usr/share/, so system administrators are
+           expected to install site plugins to /usr/share/nvim/site.
+        5. Session state directory, for state data such as swap, backupdir,
+           viewdir, undodir, etc.
+           Given by `stdpath("state")`.  |$XDG_STATE_HOME|
+        6. $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Nvim.
+        						*after-directory*
+        7, 8, 9, 10. In after/ subdirectories of 1, 2, 3 and 4, with reverse
+           ordering.  This is for preferences to overrule or add to the
+           distributed defaults or system-wide settings (rarely needed).
+
+        						*packages-runtimepath*
+        "start" packages will also be searched (|runtime-search-path|) for
+        runtime files after these, though such packages are not explicitly
+        reported in &runtimepath. But "opt" packages are explicitly added to
+        &runtimepath by |:packadd|.
+
+        Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed.  Normal
+        wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
+        runtime files.  For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
+        wildcards.
+        See |:runtime|.
+        Example: >
+        	:set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
+        <	This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
+        personal Nvim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim", and finally
+        "$VIMRUNTIME" (the default runtime files).
+        You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME to find files which replace
+        distributed runtime files.  You can put a directory after $VIMRUNTIME
+        to find files which add to distributed runtime files.
+
+        With |--clean| the home directory entries are not included.
+      ]=],
+      expand = 'nodefault',
+      full_name = 'runtimepath',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('list of directories used for runtime files'),
+      tags = { 'vimfiles' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_rtp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'scr',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = 0,
+        doc = 'half the window height',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands.  Will be
+        set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
+        changes.  This may happen when enabling the |status-line| or
+        'tabline' option after setting the 'scroll' option.
+        If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
+        be used as the new value for 'scroll'.  Reset to half the window
+        height with ":set scroll=0".
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'scroll',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      pv_name = 'p_scroll',
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D'),
+      type = 'number',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sms',
+      cb = 'did_set_smoothscroll',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Scrolling works with screen lines.  When 'wrap' is set and the first
+        line in the window wraps part of it may not be visible, as if it is
+        above the window. "<<<" is displayed at the start of the first line,
+        highlighted with |hl-NonText|.
+        You may also want to add "lastline" to the 'display' option to show as
+        much of the last line as possible.
+        NOTE: only partly implemented, currently works with CTRL-E, CTRL-Y
+        and scrolling with the mouse.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'smoothscroll',
+      pv_name = 'p_sms',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_("scroll by screen lines when 'wrap' is set"),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'scbk',
+      cb = 'did_set_scrollback',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = -1,
+        doc = '10000',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum number of lines kept beyond the visible screen. Lines at the
+        top are deleted if new lines exceed this limit.
+        Minimum is 1, maximum is 100000.
+        Only in |terminal| buffers.
+
+        Note: Lines that are not visible and kept in scrollback are not
+        reflown when the terminal buffer is resized horizontally.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'scrollback',
+      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_scbk',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'scb',
+      cb = 'did_set_scrollbind',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        See also |scroll-binding|.  When this option is set, scrolling the
+        current window also scrolls other scrollbind windows (windows that
+        also have this option set).  This option is useful for viewing the
+        differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
+        See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be
+        interpreted.
+        This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
+        file.  This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
+        with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'scrollbind',
+      pv_name = 'p_scbind',
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('scroll in window as other windows scroll'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sj',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
+        screen (e.g., with "j").  Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
+        CTRL-D).  Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
+        When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the
+        percentage of the window height.  Thus -50 scrolls half the window
+        height.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'scrolljump',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines to scroll'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_sj',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'so',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
+        This will make some context visible around where you are working.  If
+        you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
+        in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
+        when long lines wrap).
+        After using the local value, go back the global value with one of
+        these two: >
+        	setlocal scrolloff<
+        	setlocal scrolloff=-1
+        <	For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'scrolloff',
+      scope = { 'global', 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimum nr. of lines above and below cursor'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_so',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sbo',
+      cb = 'did_set_scrollopt',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'ver,jump' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
+        'scrollbind' windows should behave.  'sbo' stands for ScrollBind
+        Options.
+        The following words are available:
+            ver		Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
+            hor		Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
+            jump	Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
+        		scrolling.  This offset is the difference in the first
+        		displayed line of the bound windows.  When moving
+        		around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
+        		reach a position before the start or after the end of
+        		the buffer.  The offset is not changed though, when
+        		moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
+        		to the desired position when possible.
+        		When now making that window the current one, two
+        		things can be done with the relative offset:
+        		1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
+        		   adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
+        		   window.  When going back to the other window, the
+        		   new relative offset will be used.
+        		2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
+        		   scrolled to keep the same relative offset.  When
+        		   going back to the other window, it still uses the
+        		   same relative offset.
+        Also see |scroll-binding|.
+        When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding,
+        even when "ver" isn't there.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_scrollopt',
+      full_name = 'scrollopt',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("how 'scrollbind' should behave"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sbo',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sect',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'SHNHH HUnhsh' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections.  These are pairs of
+        two letters (See |object-motions|).  The default makes a section start
+        at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'sections',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('nroff macros that separate sections'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sections',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      full_name = 'secure',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_secure',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sel',
+      cb = 'did_set_selection',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'inclusive' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option defines the behavior of the selection.  It is only used
+        in Visual and Select mode.
+        Possible values:
+           value	past line     inclusive ~
+           old		   no		yes
+           inclusive	   yes		yes
+           exclusive	   yes		no
+        "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
+        character past the line.
+        "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
+        in an operation.  For example, when "x" is used to delete the
+        selection.
+        When "old" is used and 'virtualedit' allows the cursor to move past
+        the end of line the line break still isn't included.
+        Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end
+        backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when
+        starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_selection',
+      full_name = 'selection',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('what type of selection to use'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sel',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'slm',
+      cb = 'did_set_selectmode',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This is a comma-separated list of words, which specifies when to start
+        Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
+        Possible values:
+           mouse	when using the mouse
+           key		when using shifted special keys
+           cmd		when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
+        See |Select-mode|.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_selectmode',
+      full_name = 'selectmode',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('when to use Select mode instead of Visual mode'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_slm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ssop',
+      cb = 'did_set_sessionoptions',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'blank,buffers,curdir,folds,help,tabpages,winsize,terminal' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command.  It is a comma-
+        separated list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring
+        something:
+           word		save and restore ~
+           blank	empty windows
+           buffers	hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
+           curdir	the current directory
+           folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
+        		fold options
+           globals	global variables that start with an uppercase letter
+        		and contain at least one lowercase letter.  Only
+        		String and Number types are stored.
+           help		the help window
+           localoptions	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
+        		global values for local options)
+           options	all options and mappings (also global values for local
+        		options)
+           skiprtp	exclude 'runtimepath' and 'packpath' from the options
+           resize	size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
+           sesdir	the directory in which the session file is located
+        		will become the current directory (useful with
+        		projects accessed over a network from different
+        		systems)
+           tabpages	all tab pages; without this only the current tab page
+        		is restored, so that you can make a session for each
+        		tab page separately
+           terminal	include terminal windows where the command can be
+        		restored
+           winpos	position of the whole Vim window
+           winsize	window sizes
+           slash	|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "/" in filenames.
+           unix		|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "\n" line endings.
+
+        Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". When neither is included
+        filenames are stored as absolute paths.
+        If you leave out "options" many things won't work well after restoring
+        the session.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_sessionoptions',
+      full_name = 'sessionoptions',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('options for |:mksession|'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ssop',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sd',
+      cb = 'did_set_shada',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = "!,'100,<50,s10,h",
+        doc = [[for
+               Win32:  !,'100,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:
+               others: !,'100,<50,s10,h]],
+      },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        When non-empty, the shada file is read upon startup and written
+        when exiting Vim (see |shada-file|).  The string should be a comma-
+        separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
+        identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
+        which specifies the value of that parameter.  If a particular
+        character is left out, then the default value is used for that
+        parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
+        the effect of their value.
+        CHAR	VALUE	~
+        						*shada-!*
+        !	When included, save and restore global variables that start
+        	with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
+        	letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
+        	and "_K_L_M" are not.  Nested List and Dict items may not be
+        	read back correctly, you end up with an empty item.
+        						*shada-quote*
+        "	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
+        	the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
+        	backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
+        	start of a comment!
+        						*shada-%*
+        %	When included, save and restore the buffer list.  If Vim is
+        	started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
+        	restored.  If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
+        	buffer list is restored from the shada file.  Quickfix
+        	('buftype'), unlisted ('buflisted'), unnamed and buffers on
+        	removable media (|shada-r|) are not saved.
+        	When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
+        	number of buffers that are stored.  Without a number all
+        	buffers are stored.
+        						*shada-'*
+        '	Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
+        	are remembered.  This parameter must always be included when
+        	'shada' is non-empty.
+        	Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the
+        	|changelist| are stored in the shada file.
+        						*shada-/*
+        /	Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
+        	saved.  If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
+        	patterns are also saved.  When not included, the value of
+        	'history' is used.
+        						*shada-:*
+        :	Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
+        	saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
+        						*shada-<*
+        \<	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  If zero then
+        	registers are not saved.  When not included, all lines are
+        	saved.  '"' is the old name for this item.
+        	Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in KiB.
+        						*shada-@*
+        @	Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
+        	saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
+        						*shada-c*
+        c	Dummy option, kept for compatibility reasons.  Has no actual
+        	effect: ShaDa always uses UTF-8 and 'encoding' value is fixed
+        	to UTF-8 as well.
+        						*shada-f*
+        f	Whether file marks need to be stored.  If zero, file marks ('0
+        	to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored.  When not present or when
+        	non-zero, they are all stored.  '0 is used for the current
+        	cursor position (when exiting or when doing |:wshada|).
+        						*shada-h*
+        h	Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the shada
+        	file.  When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
+        	has been used since the last search command.
+        						*shada-n*
+        n	Name of the shada file.  The name must immediately follow
+        	the 'n'.  Must be at the end of the option!  If the
+        	'shadafile' option is set, that file name overrides the one
+        	given here with 'shada'.  Environment variables are
+        	expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option.
+        						*shada-r*
+        r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
+        	',').  This parameter can be given several times.  Each
+        	specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
+        	stored.  This is to avoid removable media.  For Windows you
+        	could use "ra:,rb:".  You can also use it for temp files,
+        	e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp".  Case is ignored.
+        						*shada-s*
+        s	Maximum size of an item contents in KiB.  If zero then nothing
+        	is saved.  Unlike Vim this applies to all items, except for
+        	the buffer list and header.  Full item size is off by three
+        	unsigned integers: with `s10` maximum item size may be 1 byte
+        	(type: 7-bit integer) + 9 bytes (timestamp: up to 64-bit
+        	integer) + 3 bytes (item size: up to 16-bit integer because
+        	2^8 < 10240 < 2^16) + 10240 bytes (requested maximum item
+        	contents size) = 10253 bytes.
+
+        Example: >
+            :set shada='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/nvim/shada
+        <
+        '50		Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
+        		edited.
+        <1000		Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
+        		remembered.
+        s100		Items with contents occupying more then 100 KiB are
+        		skipped.
+        :0		Command-line history will not be saved.
+        n~/nvim/shada	The name of the file to use is "~/nvim/shada".
+        no /		Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
+        		that is, save all of the search history, and also the
+        		previous search and substitute patterns.
+        no %		The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
+        no h		'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.
+
+        When setting 'shada' from an empty value you can use |:rshada| to
+        load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.
+
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shada',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('use .shada file upon startup and exiting'),
+      tags = { 'E526', 'E527', 'E528' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_shada',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sdf',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        When non-empty, overrides the file name used for |shada| (viminfo).
+        When equal to "NONE" no shada file will be read or written.
+        This option can be set with the |-i| command line flag.  The |--clean|
+        command line flag sets it to "NONE".
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'shadafile',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('overrides the filename used for shada'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_shadafile',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sh',
+      defaults = {
+        condition = 'MSWIN',
+        if_false = 'sh',
+        if_true = 'cmd.exe',
+        doc = '$SHELL or "sh", Win32: "cmd.exe"',
+        meta = 'sh',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands.  When changing the
+        value also check these options: 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
+        'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
+        It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g.  "csh -f".
+        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+
+        If the name of the shell contains a space, you need to enclose it in
+        quotes.  Example with quotes: >
+        	:set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
+        <	Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
+        each space (to avoid ending the option value), so better use |:let-&|
+        like this: >
+        	:let &shell='"C:\Program Files\unix\sh.exe" -f'
+        <	Also note that the "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not
+        part of the command name.
+        						*shell-unquoting*
+        Rules regarding quotes:
+        1. Option is split on space and tab characters that are not inside
+           quotes: "abc def" runs shell named "abc" with additional argument
+           "def", '"abc def"' runs shell named "abc def" with no additional
+           arguments (here and below: additional means “additional to
+           'shellcmdflag'”).
+        2. Quotes in option may be present in any position and any number:
+           '"abc"', '"a"bc', 'a"b"c', 'ab"c"' and '"a"b"c"' are all equivalent
+           to just "abc".
+        3. Inside quotes backslash preceding backslash means one backslash.
+           Backslash preceding quote means one quote. Backslash preceding
+           anything else means backslash and next character literally:
+           '"a\\b"' is the same as "a\b", '"a\\"b"' runs shell named literally
+           'a"b', '"a\b"' is the same as "a\b" again.
+        4. Outside of quotes backslash always means itself, it cannot be used
+           to escape quote: 'a\"b"' is the same as "a\b".
+        Note that such processing is done after |:set| did its own round of
+        unescaping, so to keep yourself sane use |:let-&| like shown above.
+        						*shell-powershell*
+        To use PowerShell: >
+        	let &shell = executable('pwsh') ? 'pwsh' : 'powershell'
+        	let &shellcmdflag = '-NoLogo -ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned -Command [Console]::InputEncoding=[Console]::OutputEncoding=[System.Text.UTF8Encoding]::new();$PSDefaultParameterValues[''Out-File:Encoding'']=''utf8'';Remove-Alias -Force -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue tee;'
+        	let &shellredir = '2>&1 | %%{ "$_" } | Out-File %s; exit $LastExitCode'
+        	let &shellpipe  = '2>&1 | %%{ "$_" } | tee %s; exit $LastExitCode'
+        	set shellquote= shellxquote=
+
+        <	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'shell',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('name of shell to use for external commands'),
+      tags = { 'E91' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sh',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'shcf',
+      defaults = {
+        condition = 'MSWIN',
+        if_false = '-c',
+        if_true = '/s /c',
+        doc = '"-c"; Windows: "/s /c"',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
+        `bash.exe -c ls` or `cmd.exe /s /c "dir"`.  For MS-Windows, the
+        default is set according to the value of 'shell', to reduce the need
+        to set this option by the user.
+        On Unix it can have more than one flag.  Each white space separated
+        part is passed as an argument to the shell command.
+        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+        See |shell-unquoting| which talks about separating this option into
+        multiple arguments.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shellcmdflag',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('flag to shell to execute one command'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_shcf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sp',
+      defaults = {
+        condition = 'MSWIN',
+        if_false = '| tee',
+        if_true = '2>&1| tee',
+        doc = '">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee"',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
+        error file.  See also |:make_makeprg|.  See |option-backslash| about
+        including spaces and backslashes.
+        The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
+        (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
+        of this option).
+        For MS-Windows the default is "2>&1| tee".  The stdout and stderr are
+        saved in a file and echoed to the screen.
+        For Unix the default is "| tee".  The stdout of the compiler is saved
+        in a file and echoed to the screen.  If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
+        "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee".  If the
+        'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh", "zsh-beta",
+        "bash", "fish", "ash" or "dash" the default becomes "2>&1| tee".  This
+        means that stderr is also included.  Before using the 'shell' option a
+        path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses "sh".
+        The initialization of this option is done after reading the vimrc
+        and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
+        there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
+        explicitly set before.
+        When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
+        ":make" output will be done.  This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
+        that writes to 'makeef' by itself.  If you want no piping, but do
+        want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
+        Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
+        In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
+        become obsolete (at least for Unix).
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shellpipe',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('string to put output of ":make" in error file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'shq',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = '',
+        doc = [[""; Windows, when 'shell'
+               contains "sh" somewhere: "\""]],
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
+        the "!" and ":!" commands.  The redirection is kept outside of the
+        quoting.  See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection.  It's
+        probably not useful to set both options.
+        This is an empty string by default.  Only known to be useful for
+        third-party shells on Windows systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
+        or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted according
+        the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
+        user.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shellquote',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('quote character(s) for around shell command'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_shq',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'srr',
+      defaults = {
+        condition = 'MSWIN',
+        if_false = '>',
+        if_true = '>%s 2>&1',
+        doc = '">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1"',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
+        file.  See also |:!|.  See |option-backslash| about including spaces
+        and backslashes.
+        The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
+        (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
+        of this option).
+        The default is ">".  For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh" or
+        "tcsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&".  If the
+        'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh", "zsh-beta",
+        "bash" or "fish", the default becomes ">%s 2>&1".  This means that
+        stderr is also included.  For Win32, the Unix checks are done and
+        additionally "cmd" is checked for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1".
+        Also, the same names with ".exe" appended are checked for.
+        The initialization of this option is done after reading the vimrc
+        and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
+        there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
+        explicitly set before.
+        In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
+        become obsolete (at least for Unix).
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shellredir',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('string to put output of filter in a temp file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_srr',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ssl',
+      cb = 'did_set_shellslash',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        		only for MS-Windows
+        When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names.  This is
+        useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of cmd.exe.  Backward
+        slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to forward slashes by
+        Vim.
+        Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
+        existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
+        any file for best results.  This might change in the future.
+        'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
+        separator.  To test if this is so use: >
+        	if exists('+shellslash')
+        <	Also see 'completeslash'.
+      ]=],
+      enable_if = 'BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
+      full_name = 'shellslash',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('use forward slash for shell file names'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ssl',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'stmp',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, use temp files for shell commands.  When off use a pipe.
+        When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway.
+        The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file
+        and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection.
+        The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding
+        can be detected.
+        The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|,
+        |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when
+        'shelltemp' is off.
+        |system()| does not respect this option, it always uses pipes.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shelltemp',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('whether to use a temp file for shell commands'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_stmp',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sxq',
+      defaults = {
+        condition = 'MSWIN',
+        if_false = '',
+        if_true = '"',
+        doc = '"", Windows: "\\""',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
+        the "!" and ":!" commands.  Includes the redirection.  See
+        'shellquote' to exclude the redirection.  It's probably not useful
+        to set both options.
+        When the value is '(' then ')' is appended. When the value is '"('
+        then ')"' is appended.
+        When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shellxquote',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_("like 'shellquote', but include redirection"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sxq',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sxe',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this
+        option will be escaped with a '^' character.  This makes it possible
+        to execute most external commands with cmd.exe.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shellxescape',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_("characters to escape when 'shellxquote' is ("),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sxe',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sr',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'.  Applies to > and <
+        commands.  CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
+        a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shiftround',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('round indent to multiple of shiftwidth'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_sr',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sw',
+      cb = 'did_set_shiftwidth_tabstop',
+      defaults = { if_true = 8 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent.  Used for
+        |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
+        When zero the 'tabstop' value will be used.  Use the |shiftwidth()|
+        function to get the effective shiftwidth value.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'shiftwidth',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of spaces to use for (auto)indent step'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_sw',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'shm',
+      cb = 'did_set_shortmess',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'ltToOCF' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
+        messages, for example  with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
+        It is a list of flags:
+         flag	meaning when present	~
+          l	use "999L, 888B" instead of "999 lines, 888 bytes"	*shm-l*
+          m	use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"			*shm-m*
+          r	use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"			*shm-r*
+          w	use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message	*shm-w*
+        	and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
+          a	all of the above abbreviations				*shm-a*
+
+          o	overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent	*shm-o*
+        	message for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when
+        	'autowrite' on)
+          O	message for reading a file overwrites any previous	*shm-O*
+        	message;  also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn")
+          s	don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or	*shm-s*
+        	"search hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages; when using
+        	the search count do not show "W" after the count message (see
+        	S below)
+          t	truncate file message at the start if it is too long	*shm-t*
+        	to fit on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most
+        	column; ignored in Ex mode
+          T	truncate other messages in the middle if they are too	*shm-T*
+        	long to fit on the command line; "..." will appear in the
+        	middle; ignored in Ex mode
+          W	don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file	*shm-W*
+          A	don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing	*shm-A*
+        	swap file is found
+          I	don't give the intro message when starting Vim,		*shm-I*
+        	see |:intro|
+          c	don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages; for		*shm-c*
+        	example, "-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only
+        	match", "Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc.
+          C	don't give messages while scanning for ins-completion	*shm-C*
+        	items, for instance "scanning tags"
+          q	use "recording" instead of "recording @a"		*shm-q*
+          F	don't give the file info when editing a file, like	*shm-F*
+        	`:silent` was used for the command
+          S	do not show search count message when searching, e.g.	*shm-S*
+        	"[1/5]"
+
+        This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
+        requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
+        possible for the space available.  To get the whole message that you
+        would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
+        Useful values:
+            shm=	No abbreviation of message.
+            shm=a	Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
+            shm=at	Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_shortmess',
+      full_name = 'shortmess',
+      list = 'flags',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('list of flags, reduce length of messages'),
+      tags = { 'E1336' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_shm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sbr',
+      cb = 'did_set_showbreak',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped.  Useful
+        values are "> " or "+++ ": >
+        	:let &showbreak = "> "
+        	:let &showbreak = '+++ '
+        <	Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
+        comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
+        part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
+        The |hl-NonText| highlight group determines the highlighting.
+        Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
+        If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
+        "n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
+        A window-local value overrules a global value.  If the global value is
+        set and you want no value in the current window use NONE: >
+        	:setlocal showbreak=NONE
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'showbreak',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
+      scope = { 'global', 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('string to use at the start of wrapped lines'),
+      tags = { 'E595' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sbr',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sc',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen.  Set this
+        option off if your terminal is slow.
+        In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
+        - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
+          If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6"
+          means two characters and six bytes.
+        - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
+        - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters:
+          {lines}x{columns}.
+        This information can be displayed in an alternative location using the
+        'showcmdloc' option, useful when 'cmdheight' is 0.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'showcmd',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('show (partial) command in status line'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_sc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sloc',
+      cb = 'did_set_showcmdloc',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'last' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option can be used to display the (partially) entered command in
+        another location.  Possible values are:
+          last		Last line of the screen (default).
+          statusline	Status line of the current window.
+          tabline	First line of the screen if 'showtabline' is enabled.
+        Setting this option to "statusline" or "tabline" means that these will
+        be redrawn whenever the command changes, which can be on every key
+        pressed.
+        The %S 'statusline' item can be used in 'statusline' or 'tabline' to
+        place the text.  Without a custom 'statusline' or 'tabline' it will be
+        displayed in a convenient location.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_showcmdloc',
+      full_name = 'showcmdloc',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('change location of partial command'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sloc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sft',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
+        tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
+        pattern (if there is one) as possible matches.  Thus, if you have
+        matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
+        required (coding style permitting).
+        Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in
+        'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not
+        match the typed text.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'showfulltag',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('show full tag pattern when completing tag'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_sft',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sm',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one.  The
+        jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen.  The time to
+        show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
+        A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
+        seen or not).
+        When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
+        will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
+        See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
+        blinking when showing the match.
+        The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
+        matches for.  'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
+        matches.
+        Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving
+        around |pi_paren.txt|.
+        Note: Use of the short form is rated PG.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'showmatch',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('briefly jump to matching bracket if insert one'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_sm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'smd',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
+        The |hl-ModeMsg| highlight group determines the highlighting.
+        The option has no effect when 'cmdheight' is zero.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'showmode',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('message on status line to show current mode'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_smd',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'stal',
+      cb = 'did_set_showtabline',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1 },
+      desc = [=[
+        The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels
+        will be displayed:
+        	0: never
+        	1: only if there are at least two tab pages
+        	2: always
+        This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages
+        line.
+        See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'showtabline',
+      redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('tells when the tab pages line is displayed'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_stal',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ss',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1 },
+      desc = [=[
+        The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally.  Used only when
+        the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
+        When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
+        When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0.  Not used
+        for "zh" and "zl" commands.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'sidescroll',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimum number of columns to scroll horizontal'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_ss',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'siso',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
+        right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set.  Setting this option to a
+        value greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero
+        value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
+        horizontally (except at beginning of the line).  Setting this option
+        to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor
+        horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too
+        close to the beginning of the line.
+        After using the local value, go back the global value with one of
+        these two: >
+        	setlocal sidescrolloff<
+        	setlocal sidescrolloff=-1
+        <
+        Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as
+        	 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move
+        	 onto the "extends" character: >
+
+        	 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
+        	 :set sidescrolloff=1
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'sidescrolloff',
+      scope = { 'global', 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('min. nr. of columns to left and right of cursor'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_siso',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'scl',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_signcolumn',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'auto' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When and how to draw the signcolumn. Valid values are:
+           "auto"	only when there is a sign to display
+           "auto:[1-9]" resize to accommodate multiple signs up to the
+                        given number (maximum 9), e.g. "auto:4"
+           "auto:[1-8]-[2-9]"
+                        resize to accommodate multiple signs up to the
+        		given maximum number (maximum 9) while keeping
+        		at least the given minimum (maximum 8) fixed
+        		space. The minimum number should always be less
+        		than the maximum number, e.g. "auto:2-5"
+           "no"		never
+           "yes"	always
+           "yes:[1-9]"  always, with fixed space for signs up to the given
+                        number (maximum 9), e.g. "yes:3"
+           "number"	display signs in the 'number' column. If the number
+        		column is not present, then behaves like "auto".
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_signcolumn',
+      full_name = 'signcolumn',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('when to display the sign column'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'scs',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
+        case characters.  Only used when the search pattern is typed and
+        'ignorecase' option is on.  Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
+        ":g" and ":s".  Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.  After
+        "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
+        recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'smartcase',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('no ignore case when pattern has uppercase'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_scs',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'si',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line.  Works for C-like
+        programs, but can also be used for other languages.  'cindent' does
+        something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
+        see |C-indenting|.  When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set,
+        setting 'si' has no effect.  'indentexpr' is a more advanced
+        alternative.
+        Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
+        An indent is automatically inserted:
+        - After a line ending in "{".
+        - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
+        - Before a line starting with "}" (only with the "O" command).
+        When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
+        given the same indent as the matching "{".
+        When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
+        that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column.  The indent
+        is restored for the next line.  If you don't want this, use this
+        mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
+        When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
+        right.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'smartindent',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('smart autoindenting for C programs'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_si',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sta',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to
+        'shiftwidth'.  'tabstop' or 'softtabstop' is used in other places.  A
+        <BS> will delete a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the
+        line.
+        When off, a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop' or
+        'softtabstop'.  'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or
+        right |shift-left-right|.
+        What gets inserted (a <Tab> or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'
+        option.  Also see |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the
+        number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'smarttab',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("use 'shiftwidth' when inserting <Tab>"),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_sta',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sts',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing
+        operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>.  It "feels" like
+        <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is
+        used.  This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value
+        of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'.  However,
+        commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
+        When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
+        When 'sts' is negative, the value of 'shiftwidth' is used.
+        See also |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
+        spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
+        The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is
+        set.
+
+        The value of 'softtabstop' will be ignored if |'varsofttabstop'| is set
+        to anything other than an empty string.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'softtabstop',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of spaces that <Tab> uses while editing'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_sts',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_spell',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on spell checking will be done.  See |spell|.
+        The languages are specified with 'spelllang'.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'spell',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('spell checking'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'spc',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_spellcapcheck',
+      defaults = { if_true = '[.?!]\\_[\\])\'"\\t ]\\+' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Pattern to locate the end of a sentence.  The following word will be
+        checked to start with a capital letter.  If not then it is highlighted
+        with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled).
+        When this check is not wanted make this option empty.
+        Only used when 'spell' is set.
+        Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about
+        including spaces and backslashes.
+        To set this option automatically depending on the language, see
+        |set-spc-auto|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'spellcapcheck',
+      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('pattern to locate end of a sentence'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_spc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'spf',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_spellfile',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw|
+        commands.  It must end in ".{encoding}.add".  You need to include the
+        path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory.
+        The path may include characters from 'isfname', space, comma and '@'.
+        							*E765*
+        It may also be a comma-separated list of names.  A count before the
+        |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each.  This allows using
+        a personal word list file and a project word list file.
+        When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for
+        you: Using the first directory in 'runtimepath' that is writable.  If
+        there is no "spell" directory yet it will be created.  For the file
+        name the first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used,
+        ignoring the region.
+        The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not
+        have to appear in 'spelllang'.
+        Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region
+        name if you want to.  However, it will then only be used when
+        'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files
+        without region name will be found.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'spellfile',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('files where |zg| and |zw| store words'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_spf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'spl',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_spelllang',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'en' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A comma-separated list of word list names.  When the 'spell' option is
+        on spellchecking will be done for these languages.  Example: >
+        	set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical
+        <	This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized.  Words
+        that are not recognized will be highlighted.
+        The word list name must consist of alphanumeric characters, a dash or
+        an underscore.  It should not include a comma or dot.  Using a dash is
+        recommended to separate the two letter language name from a
+        specification.  Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words.
+        A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is
+        the two-letter, lower case region name.  You can use more than one
+        region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian
+        English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great
+        Britain. (Note: currently en_au and en_nz dictionaries are older than
+        en_ca, en_gb and en_us).
+        If the name "cjk" is included East Asian characters are excluded from
+        spell checking.  This is useful when editing text that also has Asian
+        words.
+        Note that the "medical" dictionary does not exist, it is just an
+        example of a longer name.
+        						*E757*
+        As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is.  The
+        first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name
+        (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter).
+        This is mainly for testing purposes.  You must make sure the correct
+        encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it.
+        How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|.
+
+        If the |spellfile.vim| plugin is active and you use a language name
+        for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin
+        will ask you if you want to download the file.
+
+        After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files
+        "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'.  "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang'
+        up to the first character that is not an ASCII letter or number and
+        not a dash.  Also see |set-spc-auto|.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'spelllang',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('language(s) to do spell checking for'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_spl',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sps',
+      cb = 'did_set_spellsuggest',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'best' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Methods used for spelling suggestions.  Both for the |z=| command and
+        the |spellsuggest()| function.  This is a comma-separated list of
+        items:
+
+        best		Internal method that works best for English.  Finds
+        		changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like
+        		scoring to improve the ordering.
+
+        double		Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the
+        		results.  The first method is "fast", the other method
+        		computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad
+        		word.  That only works when the language specifies
+        		sound folding.  Can be slow and doesn't always give
+        		better results.
+
+        fast		Internal method that only checks for simple changes:
+        		character inserts/deletes/swaps.  Works well for
+        		simple typing mistakes.
+
+        {number}	The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|.
+        		Not used for |spellsuggest()|.  The number of
+        		suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines'
+        		minus two.
+
+        timeout:{millisec}   Limit the time searching for suggestions to
+        		{millisec} milli seconds.  Applies to the following
+        		methods.  When omitted the limit is 5000. When
+        		negative there is no limit.
+
+        file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns,
+        		separated by a slash.  The first column contains the
+        		bad word, the second column the suggested good word.
+        		Example:
+        			theribal/terrible ~
+        		Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the
+        		top of the suggestion list with the internal methods.
+        		Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for
+        		comments.
+        		The word in the second column must be correct,
+        		otherwise it will not be used.  Add the word to an
+        		".add" file if it is currently flagged as a spelling
+        		mistake.
+        		The file is used for all languages.
+
+        expr:{expr}	Evaluate expression {expr}.  Use a function to avoid
+        		trouble with spaces.  |v:val| holds the badly spelled
+        		word.  The expression must evaluate to a List of
+        		Lists, each with a suggestion and a score.
+        		Example:
+        			[['the', 33], ['that', 44]] ~
+        		Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the
+        		internal methods use.  A lower score is better.
+        		This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily
+        		set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part.
+        		Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the
+        		'verbose' option to a non-zero value.
+
+        Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used.  The others may
+        appear several times in any order.  Example: >
+        	:set sps=file:~/.config/nvim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest()
+        <
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_spellsuggest',
+      full_name = 'spellsuggest',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('method(s) used to suggest spelling corrections'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sps',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'spo',
+      cb = 'did_set_spelloptions',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A comma-separated list of options for spell checking:
+        camel		When a word is CamelCased, assume "Cased" is a
+        		separate word: every upper-case character in a word
+        		that comes after a lower case character indicates the
+        		start of a new word.
+        noplainbuffer	Only spellcheck a buffer when 'syntax' is enabled,
+        		or when extmarks are set within the buffer. Only
+        		designated regions of the buffer are spellchecked in
+        		this case.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_spelloptions',
+      full_name = 'spelloptions',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_spo',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sb',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
+        one. |:split|
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'splitbelow',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('new window from split is below the current one'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_sb',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'spk',
+      cb = 'did_set_splitkeep',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'cursor' },
+      desc = [=[
+        The value of this option determines the scroll behavior when opening,
+        closing or resizing horizontal splits.
+
+        Possible values are:
+          cursor	Keep the same relative cursor position.
+          screen	Keep the text on the same screen line.
+          topline	Keep the topline the same.
+
+        For the "screen" and "topline" values, the cursor position will be
+        changed when necessary. In this case, the jumplist will be populated
+        with the previous cursor position. For "screen", the text cannot always
+        be kept on the same screen line when 'wrap' is enabled.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_splitkeep',
+      full_name = 'splitkeep',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('determines scroll behavior for split windows'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_spk',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'spr',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
+        current one. |:vsplit|
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'splitright',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('new window is put right of the current one'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_spr',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sol',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
+        non-blank of the line.  When off the cursor is kept in the same column
+        (if possible).  This applies to the commands:
+        - CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B, CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", "gg"
+        - "d", "<<" and ">>" with a linewise operator
+        - "%" with a count
+        - buffer changing commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.)
+        - Ex commands that only have a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
+        In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
+        where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'startofline',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('commands move cursor to first non-blank in line'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_sol',
+      vim = false,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'stc',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_statuscolumn',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        EXPERIMENTAL
+        When non-empty, this option determines the content of the area to the
+        side of a window, normally containing the fold, sign and number columns.
+        The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
+
+        Some of the items from the 'statusline' format are different for
+        'statuscolumn':
+
+        %l	line number of currently drawn line
+        %r	relative line number of currently drawn line
+        %s	sign column for currently drawn line
+        %C	fold column for currently drawn line
+
+        NOTE: To draw the sign and fold columns, their items must be included in
+        'statuscolumn'. Even when they are not included, the status column width
+        will adapt to the 'signcolumn' and 'foldcolumn' width.
+
+        The |v:lnum|    variable holds the line number to be drawn.
+        The |v:relnum|  variable holds the relative line number to be drawn.
+        The |v:virtnum| variable is negative when drawing virtual lines, zero
+        	      when drawing the actual buffer line, and positive when
+        	      drawing the wrapped part of a buffer line.
+
+        NOTE: The %@ click execute function item is supported as well but the
+        specified function will be the same for each row in the same column.
+        It cannot be switched out through a dynamic 'statuscolumn' format, the
+        handler should be written with this in mind.
+
+        Examples: >vim
+        	" Relative number with bar separator and click handlers:
+        	:set statuscolumn=%@SignCb@%s%=%T%@NumCb@%r│%T
+
+        	" Right aligned relative cursor line number:
+        	:let &stc='%=%{v:relnum?v:relnum:v:lnum} '
+
+        	" Line numbers in hexadecimal for non wrapped part of lines:
+        	:let &stc='%=%{v:virtnum>0?"":printf("%x",v:lnum)} '
+
+        	" Human readable line numbers with thousands separator:
+        	:let &stc='%{substitute(v:lnum,"\\d\\zs\\ze\\'
+        		   . '%(\\d\\d\\d\\)\\+$",",","g")}'
+
+        	" Both relative and absolute line numbers with different
+        	" highlighting for odd and even relative numbers:
+        	:let &stc='%#NonText#%{&nu?v:lnum:""}' .
+        	 '%=%{&rnu&&(v:lnum%2)?"\ ".v:relnum:""}' .
+        	 '%#LineNr#%{&rnu&&!(v:lnum%2)?"\ ".v:relnum:""}'
+
+        <	WARNING: this expression is evaluated for each screen line so defining
+        an expensive expression can negatively affect render performance.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'statuscolumn',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('custom format for the status column'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'stl',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_statusline',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When non-empty, this option determines the content of the status line.
+        Also see |status-line|.
+
+        The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
+        normal text.  Each status line item is of the form:
+          %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
+        All fields except the {item} are optional.  A single percent sign can
+        be given as "%%".
+
+        When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression,
+        evaluated and the result is used as the option value.  Example: >
+        	:set statusline=%!MyStatusLine()
+        <	The *g:statusline_winid* variable will be set to the |window-ID| of the
+        window that the status line belongs to.
+        The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too.
+        Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the
+        current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the
+        context of the window that the statusline belongs to.
+
+        When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made
+        empty to avoid further errors.  Otherwise screen updating would loop.
+        When the result contains unprintable characters the result is
+        unpredictable.
+
+        Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
+        'laststatus' is 2 or 3) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.
+
+        field	    meaning ~
+        -	    Left justify the item.  The default is right justified
+        	    when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
+        0	    Leading zeroes in numeric items.  Overridden by "-".
+        minwid	    Minimum width of the item, padding as set by "-" & "0".
+        	    Value must be 50 or less.
+        maxwid	    Maximum width of the item.  Truncation occurs with a "<"
+        	    on the left for text items.  Numeric items will be
+        	    shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by ">"number
+        	    where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
+        	    an exponential notation.
+        item	    A one letter code as described below.
+
+        Following is a description of the possible statusline items.  The
+        second character in "item" is the type:
+        	N for number
+        	S for string
+        	F for flags as described below
+        	- not applicable
+
+        item  meaning ~
+        f S   Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current
+              directory.
+        F S   Full path to the file in the buffer.
+        t S   File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
+        m F   Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
+        M F   Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
+        r F   Readonly flag, text is "[RO]".
+        R F   Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
+        h F   Help buffer flag, text is "[help]".
+        H F   Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
+        w F   Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]".
+        W F   Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
+        y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]".  See 'filetype'.
+        Y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM".  See 'filetype'.
+        q S   "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty.
+        k S   Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
+              being used: "<keymap>"
+        n N   Buffer number.
+        b N   Value of character under cursor.
+        B N   As above, in hexadecimal.
+        o N   Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
+              Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
+        O N   As above, in hexadecimal.
+        l N   Line number.
+        L N   Number of lines in buffer.
+        c N   Column number (byte index).
+        v N   Virtual column number (screen column).
+        V N   Virtual column number as -{num}.  Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
+        p N   Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
+        P S   Percentage through file of displayed window.  This is like the
+              percentage described for 'ruler'.  Always 3 in length, unless
+              translated.
+        S S   'showcmd' content, see 'showcmdloc'.
+        a S   Argument list status as in default title.  ({current} of {max})
+              Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
+        { NF  Evaluate expression between "%{" and "}" and substitute result.
+              Note that there is no "%" before the closing "}".  The
+              expression cannot contain a "}" character, call a function to
+              work around that.  See |stl-%{| below.
+        `{%` -  This is almost same as "{" except the result of the expression is
+              re-evaluated as a statusline format string.  Thus if the
+              return value of expr contains "%" items they will get expanded.
+              The expression can contain the "}" character, the end of
+              expression is denoted by "%}".
+              For example: >
+        	func! Stl_filename() abort
+        	    return "%t"
+        	endfunc
+        <	        `stl=%{Stl_filename()}`   results in `"%t"`
+                `stl=%{%Stl_filename()%}` results in `"Name of current file"`
+        %} -  End of "{%" expression
+        ( -   Start of item group.  Can be used for setting the width and
+              alignment of a section.  Must be followed by %) somewhere.
+        ) -   End of item group.  No width fields allowed.
+        T N   For 'tabline': start of tab page N label.  Use %T or %X to end
+              the label.  Clicking this label with left mouse button switches
+              to the specified tab page.
+        X N   For 'tabline': start of close tab N label.  Use %X or %T to end
+              the label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X.  Use %999X for a "close current
+              tab" label.    Clicking this label with left mouse button closes
+              specified tab page.
+        @ N   Start of execute function label. Use %X or %T to
+              end the label, e.g.: %10@SwitchBuffer@foo.c%X.  Clicking this
+              label runs specified function: in the example when clicking once
+              using left mouse button on "foo.c" "SwitchBuffer(10, 1, 'l',
+              '    ')" expression will be run.  Function receives the
+              following arguments in order:
+              1. minwid field value or zero if no N was specified
+              2. number of mouse clicks to detect multiple clicks
+              3. mouse button used: "l", "r" or "m" for left, right or middle
+                 button respectively; one should not rely on third argument
+                 being only "l", "r" or "m": any other non-empty string value
+                 that contains only ASCII lower case letters may be expected
+                 for other mouse buttons
+              4. modifiers pressed: string which contains "s" if shift
+                 modifier was pressed, "c" for control, "a" for alt and "m"
+                 for meta; currently if modifier is not pressed string
+                 contains space instead, but one should not rely on presence
+                 of spaces or specific order of modifiers: use |stridx()| to
+                 test whether some modifier is present; string is guaranteed
+                 to contain only ASCII letters and spaces, one letter per
+                 modifier; "?" modifier may also be present, but its presence
+                 is a bug that denotes that new mouse button recognition was
+                 added without modifying code that reacts on mouse clicks on
+                 this label.
+              Use |getmousepos()|.winid in the specified function to get the
+              corresponding window id of the clicked item.
+        \< -   Where to truncate line if too long.  Default is at the start.
+              No width fields allowed.
+        = -   Separation point between alignment sections.  Each section will
+              be separated by an equal number of spaces.  With one %= what
+              comes after it will be right-aligned.  With two %= there is a
+              middle part, with white space left and right of it.
+              No width fields allowed.
+        # -   Set highlight group.  The name must follow and then a # again.
+              Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname.  The same
+              highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current
+              windows.
+        * -   Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
+              minwid field, e.g. %1*.  Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*.
+              The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied to
+              StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows.
+              The number N must be between 1 and 9.  See |hl-User1..9|
+
+        When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when
+        that flag comes right after plaintext.  This will make a nice display
+        when flags are used like in the examples below.
+
+        When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are
+        not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
+        become empty.  This will make a group like the following disappear
+        completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >
+        	:set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
+        <	Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
+        line is displayed.
+        			*stl-%{* *g:actual_curbuf* *g:actual_curwin*
+        While evaluating %{} the current buffer and current window will be set
+        temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
+        currently being drawn.  The expression will evaluate in this context.
+        The variable "g:actual_curbuf" is set to the `bufnr()` number of the
+        real current buffer and "g:actual_curwin" to the |window-ID| of the
+        real current window.  These values are strings.
+
+        The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from
+        a modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+
+        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
+        evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|.
+
+        If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
+        a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
+        using `:redrawstatus`.
+
+        A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
+        Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
+        described above.
+
+        Watch out for errors in expressions.  They may render Vim unusable!
+        If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
+        edit your vimrc or whatever with "vim --clean" to get it right.
+
+        Examples:
+        Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
+          :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
+        <	Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >
+          :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
+        <	Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >
+          :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
+          :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
+        <	Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >
+          :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
+        <	In the |:autocmd|'s: >
+          :let b:gzflag = 1
+        <	And: >
+          :unlet b:gzflag
+        <	And define this function: >
+          :function VarExists(var, val)
+          :    if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
+          :endfunction
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'statusline',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'global', 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('custom format for the status line'),
+      tags = { 'E540', 'E542' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_stl',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'su',
+      defaults = { if_true = '.bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
+        match a wildcard.  See |suffixes|.  Commas can be used to separate the
+        suffixes.  Spaces after the comma are ignored.  A dot is also seen as
+        the start of a suffix.  To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
+        separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
+        including spaces and backslashes).
+        See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
+        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+        suffixes from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+        uses another default.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'suffixes',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('suffixes that are ignored with multiple match'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_su',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'sua',
+      alloced = true,
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Comma-separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
+        file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands.  Example: >
+        	:set suffixesadd=.java
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'suffixesadd',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('suffixes added when searching for a file'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_sua',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'swf',
+      cb = 'did_set_swapfile',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        Use a swapfile for the buffer.  This option can be reset when a
+        swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer.  For example, with
+        confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
+        Careful: All text will be in memory:
+        	- Don't use this for big files.
+        	- Recovery will be impossible!
+        A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and
+        'swapfile' is set.
+        When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
+        immediately deleted.  When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
+        non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
+        Also see |swap-file|.
+        If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it,
+        use the |:noswapfile| modifier.
+        See 'directory' for where the swap file is created.
+
+        This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
+        specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'swapfile',
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('whether to use a swapfile for a buffer'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_swf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'swb',
+      cb = 'did_set_switchbuf',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'uselast' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
+        This option is checked, when
+        - jumping to errors with the |quickfix| commands (|:cc|, |:cn|, |:cp|,
+          etc.).
+        - jumping to a tag using the |:stag| command.
+        - opening a file using the |CTRL-W_f| or |CTRL-W_F| command.
+        - jumping to a buffer using a buffer split command (e.g.  |:sbuffer|,
+          |:sbnext|, or |:sbrewind|).
+        Possible values (comma-separated list):
+           useopen	If included, jump to the first open window in the
+        		current tab page that contains the specified buffer
+        		(if there is one).  Otherwise: Do not examine other
+        		windows.
+           usetab	Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab
+        		pages.
+           split	If included, split the current window before loading
+        		a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors.
+        		Otherwise: do not split, use current window (when used
+        		in the quickfix window: the previously used window or
+        		split if there is no other window).
+           vsplit	Just like "split" but split vertically.
+           newtab	Like "split", but open a new tab page.  Overrules
+        		"split" when both are present.
+           uselast	If included, jump to the previously used window when
+        		jumping to errors with |quickfix| commands.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_switchbuf',
+      full_name = 'switchbuf',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('sets behavior when switching to another buffer'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_swb',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'smc',
+      defaults = { if_true = 3000 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum column in which to search for syntax items.  In long lines the
+        text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not
+        be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared.
+        This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one
+        long line.
+        Set to zero to remove the limit.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'synmaxcol',
+      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum column to find syntax items'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_smc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'syn',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_filetype_or_syntax',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
+        syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
+        Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
+        b:current_syntax variable does).
+        This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
+        not automatically recognized.  Example, in an IDL file: >
+        	/* vim: set syntax=idl : */
+        <	When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
+        names.  Example: >
+        	/* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */
+        <	This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax.
+        Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition,
+        otherwise it will be skipped.  More than one dot may appear.
+        To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
+        	:set syntax=OFF
+        <	To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
+        'filetype' option: >
+        	:set syntax=ON
+        <	What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
+        Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
+        This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
+        'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
+        Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'syntax',
+      noglob = true,
+      normal_fname_chars = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('syntax to be loaded for current buffer'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_syn',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tfu',
+      cb = 'did_set_tagfunc',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option specifies a function to be used to perform tag searches.
+        The function gets the tag pattern and should return a List of matching
+        tags.  See |tag-function| for an explanation of how to write the
+        function and an example.  The value can be the name of a function, a
+        |lambda| or a |Funcref|. See |option-value-function| for more
+        information.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'tagfunc',
+      func = true,
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('function used to perform tag searches'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_tfu',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tal',
+      cb = 'did_set_tabline',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When non-empty, this option determines the content of the tab pages
+        line at the top of the Vim window.  When empty Vim will use a default
+        tab pages line.  See |setting-tabline| for more info.
+
+        The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline'
+        option and only when there is no GUI tab line.  When 'e' is in
+        'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used
+        instead.  Note that the two tab pages lines are very different.
+
+        The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'.  You can use
+        |tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out
+        the text to be displayed.  Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for
+        the second one, etc.  Use "%X" items for closing labels.
+
+        When changing something that is used in 'tabline' that does not
+        trigger it to be updated, use |:redrawtabline|.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+
+        Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others
+        are invisible and you can't jump to their windows.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'tabline',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      redraw = { 'tabline' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('custom format for the console tab pages line'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_tal',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tpm',
+      defaults = { if_true = 50 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line
+        argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage|
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'tabpagemax',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum number of tab pages for |-p| and "tab all"'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_tpm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ts',
+      cb = 'did_set_shiftwidth_tabstop',
+      defaults = { if_true = 8 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for.  Also see
+        the |:retab| command, and the 'softtabstop' option.
+
+        Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file
+        appear wrong in many places.
+        The value must be more than 0 and less than 10000.
+
+        There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim:
+        1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4
+           (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'.  Then Vim
+           will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing <Tab> and <BS> will
+           behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters.
+           This is the recommended way, the file will look the same with other
+           tools and when listing it in a terminal.
+        2. Set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use
+           'expandtab'.  This way you will always insert spaces.  The
+           formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed (leave
+           it at 8 just in case).  The file will be a bit larger.
+           You do need to check if no Tabs exist in the file.  You can get rid
+           of them by first setting 'expandtab' and using `%retab!`, making
+           sure the value of 'tabstop' is set correctly.
+        3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use
+           'expandtab'.  This way you will always insert spaces.  The
+           formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed.
+           You do need to check if no Tabs exist in the file, just like in the
+           item just above.
+        4. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a
+           |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again.  Only
+           works when using Vim to edit the file, other tools assume a tabstop
+           is worth 8 spaces.
+        5. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and
+           'noexpandtab'.  This should then work (for initial indents only)
+           for any tabstop setting that people use.  It might be nice to have
+           tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this
+           though.  Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is
+           changed.
+
+        The value of 'tabstop' will be ignored if |'vartabstop'| is set to
+        anything other than an empty string.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'tabstop',
+      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of spaces that <Tab> in file uses'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_ts',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tbs',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
+        use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file.  Binary
+        searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
+        will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
+        Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
+        they are not sorted.  Only when this is not the case does the
+        'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.
+
+        When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
+        files.  In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
+        certain files, or retry all files with a linear search.  When
+        'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.
+
+        Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
+        at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
+           !_TAG_FILE_SORTED	0	/some comment/
+        <	[The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]
+
+        When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
+        files listed in 'tags', and case is ignored or a pattern is used
+        instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
+        Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
+        be found in the retry.
+
+        If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,
+        linear search can be avoided when case is ignored.  Use a value of '2'
+        in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this.  A tag file can be case-fold
+        sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in the command:
+        "sort -f -o tags tags".  For Universal ctags and Exuberant ctags
+        version 5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be
+        used for this as well.  Note that case must be folded to uppercase for
+        this to work.
+
+        By default, tag searches are case-sensitive.  Case is ignored when
+        'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is
+        "ignore".
+        Also when 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' is set, or
+        'tagcase' is "smart", and the pattern contains only lowercase
+        characters.
+
+        When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
+        exists, but faster when no full match exists.  Tags in unsorted tags
+        files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
+        When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
+        ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
+        must be included in the tags file.
+        This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
+        command-line completion and ":help").
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'tagbsearch',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('use binary searching in tags files'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_tbs',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tc',
+      cb = 'did_set_tagcase',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'followic' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option specifies how case is handled when searching the tags
+        file:
+           followic	Follow the 'ignorecase' option
+           followscs    Follow the 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options
+           ignore	Ignore case
+           match	Match case
+           smart	Ignore case unless an upper case letter is used
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_tagcase',
+      full_name = 'tagcase',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('how to handle case when searching in tags files'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_tc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tl',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'taglength',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('number of significant characters for a tag'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_tl',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tr',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that
+        tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'tagrelative',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('file names in tag file are relative'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_tr',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tag',
+      defaults = { if_true = './tags;,tags' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas.  To
+        include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with backslashes
+        (see |option-backslash| about including spaces/commas and backslashes).
+        When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
+        of the current file.  But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
+        'cpoptions'.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  Also see
+        |tags-option|.
+        "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
+        a directory tree.  See |file-searching|.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will
+        find all files named "tags" below "/lib".  The filename itself cannot
+        contain wildcards, it is used as-is.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find
+        files called "tags?".
+        The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names
+        actually used.
+        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+        file names from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+        uses another default.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'tags',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('list of file names used by the tag command'),
+      tags = { 'E433' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_tags',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tgst',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, the |tagstack| is used normally.  When off, a ":tag" or
+        ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
+        tagstack.  A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
+        any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
+        tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
+        Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
+        mapping which should not change the tagstack.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'tagstack',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('push tags onto the tag stack'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_tgst',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tbidi',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
+        by Unicode).  The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
+        that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
+        Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
+        'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
+        Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
+        'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
+        For further details see |arabic.txt|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'termbidi',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('terminal takes care of bi-directionality'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_tbidi',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tenc',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      full_name = 'termencoding',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Terminal encoding'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tgc',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Enables 24-bit RGB color in the |TUI|.  Uses "gui" |:highlight|
+        attributes instead of "cterm" attributes. |guifg|
+        Requires an ISO-8613-3 compatible terminal.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'termguicolors',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Terminal true color support'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_tgc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tpf',
+      cb = 'did_set_termpastefilter',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'BS,HT,ESC,DEL' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A comma-separated list of options for specifying control characters
+        to be removed from the text pasted into the terminal window. The
+        supported values are:
+
+           BS	    Backspace
+
+           HT	    TAB
+
+           FF	    Form feed
+
+           ESC	    Escape
+
+           DEL	    DEL
+
+           C0	    Other control characters, excluding Line feed and
+        	    Carriage return < ' '
+
+           C1	    Control characters 0x80...0x9F
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_termpastefilter',
+      full_name = 'termpastefilter',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_tpf',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        If the host terminal supports it, buffer all screen updates
+        made during a redraw cycle so that each screen is displayed in
+        the terminal all at once. This can prevent tearing or flickering
+        when the terminal updates faster than Nvim can redraw.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'termsync',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('synchronize redraw output with the host terminal'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_termsync',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      full_name = 'terse',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      immutable = true,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tw',
+      cb = 'did_set_textwidth',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum width of text that is being inserted.  A longer line will be
+        broken after white space to get this width.  A zero value disables
+        this.
+        When 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used.  See also
+        'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
+        When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'textwidth',
+      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum width of text that is being inserted'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_tw',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tsr',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
+        for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.  See
+        |compl-thesaurus|.
+
+        This option is not used if 'thesaurusfunc' is set, either for the
+        buffer or globally.
+
+        To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
+        after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
+        name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.  The use of
+        |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing directories
+        from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version uses
+        another default.  Backticks cannot be used in this option for security
+        reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'thesaurus',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      normal_dname_chars = true,
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('list of thesaurus files for keyword completion'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_tsr',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tsrfu',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_thesaurusfunc',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option specifies a function to be used for thesaurus completion
+        with CTRL-X CTRL-T. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T| See |compl-thesaurusfunc|.
+        The value can be the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.
+        See |option-value-function| for more information.
+
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'thesaurusfunc',
+      func = true,
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('function used for thesaurus completion'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_tsrfu',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'top',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'tildeop',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('tilde command "~" behaves like an operator'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_to',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'to',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option and 'timeoutlen' determine the behavior when part of a
+        mapped key sequence has been received. For example, if <c-f> is
+        pressed and 'timeout' is set, Nvim will wait 'timeoutlen' milliseconds
+        for any key that can follow <c-f> in a mapping.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'timeout',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('time out on mappings and key codes'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_timeout',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tm',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1000 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Time in milliseconds to wait for a mapped sequence to complete.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'timeoutlen',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('time out time in milliseconds'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_tm',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_title_icon',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
+        'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
+        	filename [+=-] (path) - NVIM
+        Where:
+        	filename	the name of the file being edited
+        	-		indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
+        	+		indicates the file was modified
+        	=		indicates the file is read-only
+        	=+		indicates the file is read-only and modified
+        	(path)		is the path of the file being edited
+        	- NVIM		the server name |v:servername| or "NVIM"
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'title',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Vim set the title of the window'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_title',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_titlelen',
+      defaults = { if_true = 85 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
+        title.  When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
+        shown.  A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
+        Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window.  But
+        it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
+        available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
+        bar.  When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used.  Otherwise,
+        values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
+        'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'titlelen',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("of 'columns' used for window title"),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_titlelen',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        If not empty, this option will be used to set the window title when
+        exiting.  Only if 'title' is enabled.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'titleold',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('title, restored when exiting'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_titleold',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_titlestring',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
+        window.  This happens only when the 'title' option is on.
+
+        When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
+        expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+
+        Example: >
+            :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() .. "/" .. expand("%:p")
+            :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
+        <	The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
+        of the available space.
+        Some people prefer to have the file name first: >
+            :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
+        <	Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
+        without the file name.  The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
+        separating space only when needed.
+        NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
+        to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'titlestring',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('to use for the Vim window title'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_titlestring',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option and 'ttimeoutlen' determine the behavior when part of a
+        key code sequence has been received by the |TUI|.
+
+        For example if <Esc> (the \x1b byte) is received and 'ttimeout' is
+        set, Nvim waits 'ttimeoutlen' milliseconds for the terminal to
+        complete a key code sequence. If no input arrives before the timeout,
+        a single <Esc> is assumed. Many TUI cursor key codes start with <Esc>.
+
+        On very slow systems this may fail, causing cursor keys not to work
+        sometimes.  If you discover this problem you can ":set ttimeoutlen=9999".
+        Nvim will wait for the next character to arrive after an <Esc>.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'ttimeout',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('out on mappings'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ttimeout',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ttm',
+      defaults = { if_true = 50 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Time in milliseconds to wait for a key code sequence to complete. Also
+        used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G when part of a command has
+        been typed.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'ttimeoutlen',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('time out time for key codes in milliseconds'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_ttm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'tf',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      full_name = 'ttyfast',
+      no_mkrc = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('No description'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      immutable = true,
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'udir',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas.
+        See 'backupdir' for details of the format.
+        "." means using the directory of the file.  The undo file name for
+        "file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~".
+        For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited
+        file, with path separators replaced with "%".
+        When writing: The first directory that exists is used.  "." always
+        works, no directories after "." will be used for writing.  If none of
+        the directories exist Nvim will attempt to create the last directory in
+        the list.
+        When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file.  The first
+        undo file that exists is used.  When it cannot be read an error is
+        given, no further entry is used.
+        See |undo-persistence|.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+
+        Note that unlike 'directory' and 'backupdir', 'undodir' always acts as
+        though the trailing slashes are present (see 'backupdir' for what this
+        means).
+      ]=],
+      expand = 'nodefault',
+      full_name = 'undodir',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('where to store undo files'),
+      tags = { 'E5003' },
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_udir',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'udf',
+      cb = 'did_set_undofile',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when
+        writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same
+        file on buffer read.
+        The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'.
+        For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|.
+        The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from
+        before a reload to be saved for undo.
+        When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'undofile',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('save undo information in a file'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_udf',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ul',
+      cb = 'did_set_undolevels',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1000 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Maximum number of changes that can be undone.  Since undo information
+        is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used.
+        Nevertheless, a single change can already use a large amount of memory.
+        Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes
+        itself: >
+        	set ul=0
+        <	But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
+        'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
+        Also see |undo-two-ways|.
+        Set to -1 for no undo at all.  You might want to do this only for the
+        current buffer: >
+        	setlocal ul=-1
+        <	This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.
+
+        The local value is set to -123456 when the global value is to be used.
+
+        Also see |clear-undo|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'undolevels',
+      scope = { 'global', 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('maximum number of changes that can be undone'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_ul',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ur',
+      defaults = { if_true = 10000 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it.  This applies to the
+        ":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of
+        Vim. |FileChangedShell|
+        The save only happens when this option is negative or when the number
+        of lines is smaller than the value of this option.
+        Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload.
+
+        When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read.
+
+        Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory.  Set
+        this option to a lower value if you run out of memory.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'undoreload',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('max nr of lines to save for undo on a buffer reload'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_ur',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'uc',
+      cb = 'did_set_updatecount',
+      defaults = { if_true = 200 },
+      desc = [=[
+        After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
+        disk.  When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
+        recovery |crash-recovery|).  'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
+        Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|.  When editing in readonly
+        mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
+        The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|.
+        When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
+        created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set.  When 'updatecount'
+        is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
+        This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile"
+        or "nowrite".
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'updatecount',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('after this many characters flush swap file'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_uc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ut',
+      defaults = { if_true = 4000 },
+      desc = [=[
+        If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
+        written to disk (see |crash-recovery|).  Also used for the
+        |CursorHold| autocommand event.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'updatetime',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('after this many milliseconds flush swap file'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_ut',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'vsts',
+      cb = 'did_set_varsofttabstop',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        A list of the number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while editing,
+        such as inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>.  It "feels" like variable-
+        width <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mixture of spaces
+        and <Tab>s is used.  Tab widths are separated with commas, with the
+        final value applying to all subsequent tabs.
+
+        For example, when editing assembly language files where statements
+        start in the 9th column and comments in the 41st, it may be useful
+        to use the following: >
+        	:set varsofttabstop=8,32,8
+        <	This will set soft tabstops with 8 and 8 + 32 spaces, and 8 more
+        for every column thereafter.
+
+        Note that the value of |'softtabstop'| will be ignored while
+        'varsofttabstop' is set.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'varsofttabstop',
+      list = 'comma',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('list of numbers of spaces that <Tab> uses while editing'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_vsts',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'vts',
+      cb = 'did_set_vartabstop',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        A list of the number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for,
+        separated by commas.  Each value corresponds to one tab, with the
+        final value applying to all subsequent tabs. For example: >
+        	:set vartabstop=4,20,10,8
+        <	This will make the first tab 4 spaces wide, the second 20 spaces,
+        the third 10 spaces, and all following tabs 8 spaces.
+
+        Note that the value of |'tabstop'| will be ignored while 'vartabstop'
+        is set.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'vartabstop',
+      list = 'comma',
+      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('list of numbers of spaces that <Tab> in file uses'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_vts',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'vbs',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Sets the verbosity level.  Also set by |-V| and |:verbose|.
+
+        Tracing of options in Lua scripts is activated at level 1; Lua scripts
+        are not traced with verbose=0, for performance.
+
+        If greater than or equal to a given level, Nvim produces the following
+        messages:
+
+        Level   Messages ~
+        ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+        1	Lua assignments to options, mappings, etc.
+        2	When a file is ":source"'ed, or |shada| file is read or written.
+        3	UI info, terminal capabilities.
+        4	Shell commands.
+        5	Every searched tags file and include file.
+        8	Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
+        9	Executed autocommands.
+        11	Finding items in a path.
+        12	Vimscript function calls.
+        13	When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
+        14	Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
+        15	Ex commands from a script (truncated at 200 characters).
+        16	Ex commands.
+
+        If 'verbosefile' is set then the verbose messages are not displayed.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'verbose',
+      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('give informative messages'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_verbose',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'vfile',
+      cb = 'did_set_verbosefile',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name.
+        When the file exists messages are appended.
+        Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made
+        empty.  Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time.
+        Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first.
+        The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not
+        displayed when 'verbosefile' is set.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = true,
+      full_name = 'verbosefile',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('file to write messages in'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_vfile',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'vdir',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
+        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+        security reasons.
+      ]=],
+      expand = 'nodefault',
+      full_name = 'viewdir',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      secure = true,
+      short_desc = N_('directory where to store files with :mkview'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_vdir',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'vop',
+      cb = 'did_set_viewoptions',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'folds,cursor,curdir' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command.  It is a comma-separated
+        list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring something:
+           word		save and restore ~
+           cursor	cursor position in file and in window
+           curdir	local current directory, if set with |:lcd|
+           folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
+        		fold options
+           options	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
+        		global values for local options)
+           localoptions same as "options"
+           slash	|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "/" in filenames.
+           unix		|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "\n" line endings.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_sessionoptions',
+      full_name = 'viewoptions',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('specifies what to save for :mkview'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_vop',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'vi',
+      full_name = 'viminfo',
+      nodefault = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Alias for shada'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'vif',
+      full_name = 'viminfofile',
+      nodefault = true,
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('Alias for shadafile instead'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 've',
+      cb = 'did_set_virtualedit',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A comma-separated list of these words:
+            block	Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
+            insert	Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
+            all		Allow virtual editing in all modes.
+            onemore	Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line
+            none	When used as the local value, do not allow virtual
+        		editing even when the global value is set.  When used
+        		as the global value, "none" is the same as "".
+            NONE	Alternative spelling of "none".
+
+        Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
+        no actual character.  This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end
+        of the line.  Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
+        editing a table.
+        "onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just
+        after the last character of the line.  This makes some commands more
+        consistent.  Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line
+        if the line was empty.  But it is far from Vi compatible.  It may also
+        break some plugins or Vim scripts.  For example because |l| can move
+        the cursor after the last character.  Use with care!
+        Using the `$` command will move to the last character in the line, not
+        past it.  This may actually move the cursor to the left!
+        The `g$` command will move to the end of the screen line.
+        It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will
+        not get a warning for it.
+        When combined with other words, "none" is ignored.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_virtualedit',
+      full_name = 'virtualedit',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      redraw = { 'curswant' },
+      scope = { 'global', 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('when to use virtual editing'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ve',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'vb',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Use visual bell instead of beeping.  Also see 'errorbells'.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'visualbell',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('use visual bell instead of beeping'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_vb',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
+        has been changed.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'warn',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('for shell command when buffer was changed'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_warn',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ww',
+      cb = 'did_set_whichwrap',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'b,s' },
+      desc = [=[
+        Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
+        previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
+        the line.  Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
+        	char   key	  mode	~
+        	 b    <BS>	 Normal and Visual
+        	 s    <Space>	 Normal and Visual
+        	 h    "h"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
+        	 l    "l"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
+        	 <    <Left>	 Normal and Visual
+        	 >    <Right>	 Normal and Visual
+        	 ~    "~"	 Normal
+        	 [    <Left>	 Insert and Replace
+        	 ]    <Right>	 Insert and Replace
+        For example: >
+        	:set ww=<,>,[,]
+        <	allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
+        When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
+        operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character.  This makes "3h"
+        different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line.  This
+        is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
+        "dh".  If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
+        ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
+        cursor.
+        When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a
+        line (not an empty line) then it will not move to the next line.  This
+        makes "dl", "cl", "yl" etc. work normally.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_whichwrap',
+      full_name = 'whichwrap',
+      list = 'flagscomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('allow specified keys to cross line boundaries'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_ww',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wc',
+      cb = 'did_set_wildchar',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = imacros('TAB'),
+        doc = '<Tab>',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
+        command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
+        More info here: |cmdline-completion|.
+        The character is not recognized when used inside a macro.  See
+        'wildcharm' for that.
+        Some keys will not work, such as CTRL-C, <CR> and Enter.
+        <Esc> can be used, but hitting it twice in a row will still exit
+        command-line as a failsafe measure.
+        Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: >
+        	:set wc=<Tab>
+        <
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'wildchar',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('command-line character for wildcard expansion'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_wc',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wcm',
+      cb = 'did_set_wildchar',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
+        recognized when used inside a macro.  You can find "spare" command-line
+        keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|.  Normally
+        you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that
+        automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: >
+        	:set wcm=<C-Z>
+        	:cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
+        <	Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'wildcharm',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("like 'wildchar' but also works when mapped"),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_wcm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wig',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A list of file patterns.  A file that matches with one of these
+        patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or
+        directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and
+        |globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this.
+        The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-pattern|.
+        Also see 'suffixes'.
+        Example: >
+        	:set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
+        <	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+        a pattern from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+        uses another default.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'wildignore',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('files matching these patterns are not completed'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_wig',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wic',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories.
+        Has no effect when 'fileignorecase' is set.
+        Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which
+        happens when there are special characters.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'wildignorecase',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('ignore case when completing file names'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_wic',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wmnu',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
+        mode.  On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
+        the possible matches are shown.
+        When 'wildoptions' contains "pum", then the completion matches are
+        shown in a popup menu.  Otherwise they are displayed just above the
+        command line, with the first match highlighted (overwriting the status
+        line, if there is one).
+        Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
+        CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
+        'wildmode' must specify "full": "longest" and "list" do not start
+        'wildmenu' mode. You can check the current mode with |wildmenumode()|.
+        The menu is cancelled when a key is hit that is not used for selecting
+        a completion.
+
+        While the menu is active these keys have special meanings:
+        CTRL-P		- go to the previous entry
+        CTRL-N		- go to the next entry
+        <Left> <Right>	- select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
+        <PageUp>	- select a match several entries back
+        <PageDown>	- select a match several entries further
+        <Up>		- in filename/menu name completion: move up into
+        		  parent directory or parent menu.
+        <Down>		- in filename/menu name completion: move into a
+        		  subdirectory or submenu.
+        <CR>		- in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
+        		  dot: move into a submenu.
+        CTRL-E		- end completion, go back to what was there before
+        		  selecting a match.
+        CTRL-Y		- accept the currently selected match and stop
+        		  completion.
+
+        If you want <Left> and <Right> to move the cursor instead of selecting
+        a different match, use this: >
+        	:cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
+        	:cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
+        <
+        |hl-WildMenu| highlights the current match.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'wildmenu',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('use menu for command line completion'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_wmnu',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wim',
+      cb = 'did_set_wildmode',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'full' },
+      deny_duplicates = false,
+      desc = [=[
+        Completion mode that is used for the character specified with
+        'wildchar'.  It is a comma-separated list of up to four parts.  Each
+        part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar'.  The
+        first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar',
+        The second part for the second use, etc.
+
+        Each part consists of a colon separated list consisting of the
+        following possible values:
+        ""		Complete only the first match.
+        "full"		Complete the next full match.  After the last match,
+        		the original string is used and then the first match
+        		again.  Will also start 'wildmenu' if it is enabled.
+        "longest"	Complete till longest common string.  If this doesn't
+        		result in a longer string, use the next part.
+        "list"		When more than one match, list all matches.
+        "lastused"	When completing buffer names and more than one buffer
+        		matches, sort buffers by time last used (other than
+        		the current buffer).
+        When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases.
+
+        Examples of useful colon-separated values:
+        "longest:full"	Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is
+        		enabled.  Will not complete to the next full match.
+        "list:full"	When more than one match, list all matches and
+        		complete first match.
+        "list:longest"	When more than one match, list all matches and
+        		complete till longest common string.
+        "list:lastused" When more than one buffer matches, list all matches
+        		and sort buffers by time last used (other than the
+        		current buffer).
+
+        Examples: >
+        	:set wildmode=full
+        <	Complete first full match, next match, etc.  (the default) >
+        	:set wildmode=longest,full
+        <	Complete longest common string, then each full match >
+        	:set wildmode=list:full
+        <	List all matches and complete each full match >
+        	:set wildmode=list,full
+        <	List all matches without completing, then each full match >
+        	:set wildmode=longest,list
+        <	Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.
+        More info here: |cmdline-completion|.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_wildmode',
+      full_name = 'wildmode',
+      list = 'onecommacolon',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_("mode for 'wildchar' command-line expansion"),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_wim',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wop',
+      cb = 'did_set_wildoptions',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'pum,tagfile' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        A list of words that change how |cmdline-completion| is done.
+        The following values are supported:
+          fuzzy		Use |fuzzy-matching| to find completion matches. When
+        		this value is specified, wildcard expansion will not
+        		be used for completion.  The matches will be sorted by
+        		the "best match" rather than alphabetically sorted.
+        		This will find more matches than the wildcard
+        		expansion. Currently fuzzy matching based completion
+        		is not supported for file and directory names and
+        		instead wildcard expansion is used.
+          pum		Display the completion matches using the popup menu
+        		in the same style as the |ins-completion-menu|.
+          tagfile	When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of
+        		tag and the file of the tag is listed.	Only one match
+        		is displayed per line.  Often used tag kinds are:
+        			d	#define
+        			f	function
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_wildoptions',
+      full_name = 'wildoptions',
+      list = 'onecomma',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('specifies how command line completion is done'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_wop',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wak',
+      cb = 'did_set_winaltkeys',
+      defaults = { if_true = 'menu' },
+      desc = [=[
+        		only used in Win32
+        Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
+        key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
+        menu.  This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
+        entering special characters.  This option tells what to do:
+          no	Don't use ALT keys for menus.  ALT key combinations can be
+        	mapped, but there is no automatic handling.
+          yes	ALT key handling is done by the windowing system.  ALT key
+        	combinations cannot be mapped.
+          menu	Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
+        	shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system.  Other
+        	keys can be mapped.
+        If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
+        key is never used for the menu.
+        This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32.
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_winaltkeys',
+      full_name = 'winaltkeys',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('when the windows system handles ALT keys'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_wak',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wbr',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_winbar',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      desc = [=[
+        When non-empty, this option enables the window bar and determines its
+        contents. The window bar is a bar that's shown at the top of every
+        window with it enabled. The value of 'winbar' is evaluated like with
+        'statusline'.
+
+        When changing something that is used in 'winbar' that does not trigger
+        it to be updated, use |:redrawstatus|.
+
+        Floating windows do not use the global value of 'winbar'. The
+        window-local value of 'winbar' must be set for a floating window to
+        have a window bar.
+
+        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'winbar',
+      modelineexpr = true,
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'global', 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('custom format for the window bar'),
+      type = 'string',
+      varname = 'p_wbr',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'winbl',
+      cb = 'did_set_winblend',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Enables pseudo-transparency for a floating window. Valid values are in
+        the range of 0 for fully opaque window (disabled) to 100 for fully
+        transparent background. Values between 0-30 are typically most useful.
+
+        UI-dependent. Works best with RGB colors. 'termguicolors'
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'winblend',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('Controls transparency level for floating windows'),
+      type = 'number',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'winhl',
+      alloced = true,
+      cb = 'did_set_winhighlight',
+      defaults = { if_true = '' },
+      deny_duplicates = true,
+      desc = [=[
+        Window-local highlights.  Comma-delimited list of highlight
+        |group-name| pairs "{hl-from}:{hl-to},..." where each {hl-from} is
+        a |highlight-groups| item to be overridden by {hl-to} group in
+        the window.
+
+        Note: highlight namespaces take precedence over 'winhighlight'.
+        See |nvim_win_set_hl_ns()| and |nvim_set_hl()|.
+
+        Highlights of vertical separators are determined by the window to the
+        left of the separator.  The 'tabline' highlight of a tabpage is
+        decided by the last-focused window of the tabpage.  Highlights of
+        the popupmenu are determined by the current window.  Highlights in the
+        message area cannot be overridden.
+
+        Example: show a different color for non-current windows: >
+        	set winhighlight=Normal:MyNormal,NormalNC:MyNormalNC
+        <
+      ]=],
+      expand_cb = 'expand_set_winhighlight',
+      full_name = 'winhighlight',
+      list = 'onecommacolon',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('Setup window-local highlights'),
+      type = 'string',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wi',
+      cb = 'did_set_window',
+      defaults = {
+        if_true = 0,
+        doc = 'screen height - 1',
+      },
+      desc = [=[
+        Window height used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one
+        window and the value is smaller than 'lines' minus one.  The screen
+        will scroll 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one.
+        When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll
+        in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines.
+        When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than
+        or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1.
+        Note: Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window, use
+        'lines' for that.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'window',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('nr of lines to scroll for CTRL-F and CTRL-B'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_window',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wh',
+      cb = 'did_set_winheight',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Minimal number of lines for the current window.  This is not a hard
+        minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room.  If the
+        focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the
+        cost of the height of other windows.
+        Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing.
+        Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen.
+        Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high.  This has the drawback
+        that ":all" will create only two windows.  To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4"
+        to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done,
+        using the |VimEnter| event: >
+        	au VimEnter * set winheight=999
+        <	Minimum value is 1.
+        The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the
+        height of the current window.
+        'winheight' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminheight' to set
+        the minimal height for other windows.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'winheight',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines for the current window'),
+      tags = { 'E591' },
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_wh',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wfh',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
+        'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.  Set by default for the
+        |preview-window| and |quickfix-window|.
+        The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'winfixheight',
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('keep window height when opening/closing windows'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wfw',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and
+        'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.
+        The width may be changed anyway when running out of room.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'winfixwidth',
+      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('keep window width when opening/closing windows'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wmh',
+      cb = 'did_set_winminheight',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1 },
+      desc = [=[
+        The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
+        This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
+        When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
+        status bar) if necessary.  They will return to at least one line when
+        they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
+        Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
+        This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
+        large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
+        windows.  A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'winminheight',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines for any window'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_wmh',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wmw',
+      cb = 'did_set_winminwidth',
+      defaults = { if_true = 1 },
+      desc = [=[
+        The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
+        This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
+        When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
+        a vertical separator) if necessary.  They will return to at least one
+        line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
+        to go.)
+        Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
+        This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
+        large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
+        windows.  A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'winminwidth',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimal number of columns for any window'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_wmw',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wiw',
+      cb = 'did_set_winwidth',
+      defaults = { if_true = 20 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Minimal number of columns for the current window.  This is not a hard
+        minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room.  If
+        the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
+        the width of other windows.  Set it to 999 to make the current window
+        always fill the screen.  Set it to a small number for normal editing.
+        The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
+        width of the current window.
+        'winwidth' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminwidth' to set
+        the minimal width for other windows.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'winwidth',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('minimal number of columns for current window'),
+      tags = { 'E592' },
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_wiw',
+    },
+    {
+      cb = 'did_set_wrap',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        This option changes how text is displayed.  It doesn't change the text
+        in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
+        When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
+        displaying continues on the next line.  When off lines will not wrap
+        and only part of long lines will be displayed.  When the cursor is
+        moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
+        horizontally.
+        The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary.  See
+        'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
+        To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >
+        	:set sidescroll=5
+        	:set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
+        <	See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
+        This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
+        on.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'wrap',
+      redraw = { 'current_window' },
+      scope = { 'window' },
+      short_desc = N_('lines wrap and continue on the next line'),
+      type = 'bool',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wm',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
+        starts.  When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
+        and inserting continues on the next line.
+        Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
+        the text width to be further reduced.
+        When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
+        See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'wrapmargin',
+      scope = { 'buffer' },
+      short_desc = N_('chars from the right where wrapping starts'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_wm',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'ws',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        Searches wrap around the end of the file.  Also applies to |]s| and
+        |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'wrapscan',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('searches wrap around the end of the file'),
+      tags = { 'E384', 'E385' },
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_ws',
+    },
+    {
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        Allows writing files.  When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
+        Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
+        still allowed.  Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
+        argument.  Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
+        writing a temporary file.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'write',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('to a file is allowed'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_write',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wa',
+      defaults = { if_true = false },
+      desc = [=[
+        Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'writeany',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('write to file with no need for "!" override'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_wa',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wb',
+      defaults = { if_true = true },
+      desc = [=[
+        Make a backup before overwriting a file.  The backup is removed after
+        the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
+        also on.
+        WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write
+        your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
+        lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only reset
+        this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write
+        fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful).
+        See |backup-table| for another explanation.
+        When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
+        Depending on 'backupcopy' the backup is a new file or the original
+        file renamed (and a new file is written).
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'writebackup',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('make a backup before overwriting a file'),
+      type = 'bool',
+      varname = 'p_wb',
+    },
+    {
+      abbreviation = 'wd',
+      defaults = { if_true = 0 },
+      desc = [=[
+        Only takes effect together with 'redrawdebug'.
+        The number of milliseconds to wait after each line or each flush
+      ]=],
+      full_name = 'writedelay',
+      scope = { 'global' },
+      short_desc = N_('delay this many msec for each char (for debug)'),
+      type = 'number',
+      varname = 'p_wd',
+    },
+  },
 }